1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
68 \font_roman "default" "default"
69 \font_sans "default" "default"
70 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
71 \font_math "auto" "auto"
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \font_sf_scale 100 100
77 \font_tt_scale 100 100
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -195340706 "Georg Baum"
150 \author 2047637253 "Guillaume Munch"
161 by the \SpecialChar LyX
166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
168 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
169 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
170 Documentation mailing list:
171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
173 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
203 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
211 \begin_layout Standard
212 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
213 LatexCommand tableofcontents
220 \begin_layout Chapter
224 \begin_layout Section
225 What is \SpecialChar LyX
229 \begin_layout Standard
231 is a document preparation system.
232 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
233 scripts, publishable books, business
234 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
235 It is unlike most other
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
245 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 pt type, left justified, 5
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
275 \begin_layout Standard
276 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
281 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
285 \begin_layout Standard
290 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
291 's philosophy: most importantly,
292 the format of all of the manuals.
293 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
294 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
300 manual describes that, too.
303 \begin_layout Section
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
310 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
312 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
313 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
319 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
320 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
322 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
323 only a vertical scrollbar.
324 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
325 The first case is large images.
326 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
327 image and use the option
338 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
341 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
342 this doesn't work for equations yet.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
347 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
355 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
362 \begin_layout Section
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
369 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
371 Just select the manual you want to read from the
378 \begin_layout Section
379 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
392 can be configured via the menu
394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
398 \begin_inset Index idx
401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 packages are available.
412 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
414 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
416 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
421 \begin_inset space \space{}
424 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
427 To force \SpecialChar LyX
428 to re-inspect your system, you should use
430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
444 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
445 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
448 \begin_layout Section
451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
453 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
460 \begin_layout Standard
461 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
462 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
463 installed, but you will not be
464 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
465 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
466 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
467 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
468 document can always be output as plain text
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 or DocBook classes or packages.
475 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
476 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
482 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
485 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
494 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
501 \begin_inset Note Note
504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
505 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
506 Code box prevent that the term
507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
515 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
516 More about \SpecialChar TeX
517 Code is described in section
522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
524 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
528 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
529 is explained in section
534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
536 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
546 \begin_inset Index idx
549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
556 See section 5.1 of the
560 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
564 \begin_layout Chapter
565 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
569 \begin_layout Section
570 Basic File Operations
571 \begin_inset Index idx
574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
583 \begin_layout Standard
588 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
589 in addition to some more advanced operations:
592 \begin_layout Itemize
614 \begin_layout Itemize
630 arg "buffer-new-template"
636 \begin_layout Itemize
658 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \begin_layout Itemize
682 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \begin_layout Itemize
716 arg "buffer-write-as"
722 \begin_layout Itemize
736 \begin_layout Itemize
750 \begin_layout Standard
751 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
752 a few minor differences.
755 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
766 command lists the available templates.
767 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
768 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
769 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
777 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
784 \begin_layout Standard
785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
817 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
818 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
819 is just that — a big, blank space.
827 \begin_layout Standard
848 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
853 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
856 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
874 will reload the document from disk.
875 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
876 and want to restore it to the last save.
885 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
886 them as your changes.
889 \begin_layout Section
890 Basic Editing Features
891 \begin_inset Index idx
894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
903 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
910 \begin_layout Standard
911 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
912 can perform cut and paste operations
913 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
914 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
915 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
916 editing features and how to access
918 We will start with cut and paste.
921 \begin_layout Standard
922 As you might expect, the
926 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
927 various other editing features.
928 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
932 \begin_layout Itemize
938 \begin_inset Index idx
941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
970 \begin_layout Itemize
976 \begin_inset Index idx
979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1008 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset Index idx
1017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1042 \begin_layout Itemize
1046 \begin_inset space ~
1052 \begin_layout Itemize
1056 \begin_inset space ~
1062 \begin_layout Itemize
1066 \begin_inset space ~
1070 \begin_inset space ~
1076 \begin_inset Index idx
1079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1088 \begin_inset Index idx
1091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1106 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1116 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1122 \begin_layout Standard
1123 The first three are self-explanatory.
1124 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1125 and other programs by
1146 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1147 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1152 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1153 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1154 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1155 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1156 into individual cells.
1160 \begin_inset space ~
1165 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1166 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1170 \begin_layout Standard
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1179 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1181 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1196 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1197 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1198 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1204 \begin_inset space \space{}
1207 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1208 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1224 \begin_inset space ~
1233 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1234 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1236 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1245 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1246 start a new paragraph.
1247 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1248 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1256 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1270 \begin_inset space ~
1273 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1276 paste from the primary selection.
1277 This is normally the currently selected text.
1280 \begin_layout Standard
1283 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1289 \begin_inset space ~
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1307 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1313 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1316 \begin_inset space ~
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 button to skip the current word.
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1343 \begin_inset space ~
1348 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1350 If the toggle is set, searching for
1351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1362 will not match the word
1363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 Match whole words only
1379 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1380 to only find complete words, e.
1381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1410 offers also an advanced
1413 \begin_inset space ~
1417 \begin_inset space ~
1422 feature that is described in sec.
1423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1429 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1436 \begin_layout Standard
1437 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1438 \begin_inset space \space{}
1442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1450 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1452 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1457 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1464 \begin_layout Standard
1468 arg "inset-select-all"
1471 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1472 When the cursor is inside an inset
1475 arg "inset-select-all"
1478 selects the content of the inset.
1482 arg "inset-select-all"
1485 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1490 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1493 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1497 \begin_layout Section
1499 \begin_inset Index idx
1502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1509 \begin_inset Index idx
1512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1521 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1531 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1537 or the toolbar button
1543 to undo some mistake.
1544 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1546 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1549 or the toolbar button
1556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1563 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1567 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1570 \begin_layout Standard
1571 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1580 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1581 This is a consequence of the 100
1582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1585 step undo limit mentioned above.
1588 \begin_layout Standard
1597 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1599 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1603 \begin_layout Section
1605 \begin_inset Index idx
1608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1617 \begin_layout Standard
1618 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1621 \begin_layout Enumerate
1626 \begin_layout Itemize
1631 once anywhere in the edit window.
1632 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1636 \begin_layout Enumerate
1641 \begin_layout Itemize
1648 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1651 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1654 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1655 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1658 \begin_layout Itemize
1659 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1662 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1669 \begin_layout Enumerate
1670 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1674 \begin_layout Standard
1675 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1676 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1680 \begin_layout Section
1682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1684 name "sec:Navigating"
1689 \begin_inset Index idx
1692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1701 \begin_layout Standard
1703 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1706 \begin_layout Itemize
1711 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1712 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1715 \begin_layout Itemize
1716 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1718 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1720 \begin_inset space ~
1725 or by the toolbar button
1728 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1734 \begin_layout Itemize
1735 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1737 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1740 and use the same menu to return to them.
1741 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1744 \begin_layout Standard
1748 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1753 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1754 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1756 \begin_inset space ~
1761 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1762 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1763 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1764 your last editing position.
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1772 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1776 \begin_layout Subsection
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1780 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1787 \begin_layout Standard
1788 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1789 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1790 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1798 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1802 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1809 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1814 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1818 \begin_layout Standard
1819 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1820 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1821 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1822 dialog and to modify the citation.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1828 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1829 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1837 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1840 \begin_layout Standard
1841 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1842 you further to control the display.
1847 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1848 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1854 option keeps it in the current view state.
1855 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1856 \begin_inset space ~
1859 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1863 3, the subsections of sections
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1867 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1872 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1873 \begin_inset space ~
1877 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1887 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1890 \begin_layout Standard
1897 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1898 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1912 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1913 So, for example, you can move section
1914 \begin_inset space ~
1918 \begin_inset space ~
1921 2.4 or after section
1922 \begin_inset space ~
1927 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1940 (or the corresponding key bindings
1948 ) you can change the level of sections.
1949 So you can for example make section
1950 \begin_inset space ~
1954 \begin_inset space ~
1958 \begin_inset space ~
1964 \begin_layout Section
1965 Input/Word Completion
1966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1968 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1973 \begin_inset Index idx
1976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1983 \begin_inset Index idx
1986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2017 \begin_layout Standard
2019 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2021 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2022 is used to propose completions.
2025 \begin_layout Standard
2026 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2029 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2034 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2041 \begin_inset space ~
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2050 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2059 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2060 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2064 \begin_inset space ~
2070 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2071 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2072 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2073 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2076 \begin_layout Standard
2078 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2079 completions available.
2084 key to accept a proposed completion.
2085 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2086 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2087 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2094 \begin_layout Standard
2095 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2096 ing options for text.
2097 The special math option
2101 enables characters to be composed.
2102 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2103 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2106 , you can then input the characters
2107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2118 to a formula to get it.
2119 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2120 of the math toolbar.
2121 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2125 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2126 's installation folder.
2127 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2136 \begin_layout Section
2138 \begin_inset Index idx
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2148 \begin_inset Index idx
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_inset Index idx
2183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2214 \begin_layout Standard
2215 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2229 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2232 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2236 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2243 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2250 \begin_layout Standard
2254 \begin_inset space ~
2262 \begin_inset space ~
2283 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2287 \begin_layout Labeling
2288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2293 LatexCommand nomenclature
2295 description "Tabulator key"
2301 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2303 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2304 \begin_inset space ~
2308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2310 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2317 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2321 , especially section
2322 \begin_inset space ~
2326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2328 reference "subsec:Lists"
2334 If you are still confused, look in the
2339 \begin_inset Newline newline
2347 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2348 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2352 \begin_layout Labeling
2353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2357 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2358 LatexCommand nomenclature
2360 description "Escape key"
2367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2374 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2375 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2378 \begin_layout Labeling
2379 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2385 \begin_inset space ~
2389 \begin_inset space ~
2396 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2397 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2401 \begin_layout Standard
2402 There are three modifier keys:
2405 \begin_layout Labeling
2406 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2424 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2425 LatexCommand nomenclature
2427 description "Control key"
2431 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2432 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2448 \begin_layout Itemize
2457 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2460 \begin_layout Itemize
2469 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2473 \begin_layout Labeling
2474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2492 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2493 LatexCommand nomenclature
2495 description "Shift key"
2499 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2500 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2503 \begin_layout Labeling
2504 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2522 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2523 LatexCommand nomenclature
2525 description "Alt or Meta key"
2529 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2530 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2531 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2537 \begin_inset Newline newline
2540 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2542 menu accelerator keys
2545 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2546 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2550 \begin_layout Standard
2551 For example, the sequence
2552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2558 \begin_inset space ~
2562 \begin_inset space ~
2568 \begin_inset space ~
2576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2595 \begin_inset space ~
2601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2611 \begin_layout Standard
2616 manual lists all other things bound to the
2624 \begin_layout Standard
2625 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2627 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2628 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2629 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2630 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2631 The \SpecialChar LyX
2632 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2633 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2634 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2636 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2652 followed by a capital
2659 \begin_layout Chapter
2662 \begin_inset Index idx
2665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2675 \begin_layout Section
2677 \begin_inset Index idx
2680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2689 \begin_layout Subsection
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2695 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2696 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2697 numbering schemes, and so on.
2698 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2699 and format the title of your document differently.
2702 \begin_layout Standard
2707 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2708 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2709 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2710 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2711 picks one for you by default.
2712 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2715 \begin_layout Subsection
2717 \begin_inset Index idx
2720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2729 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2736 \begin_layout Standard
2737 You can select a class using the
2739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2740 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2744 \begin_inset Index idx
2747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2754 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2758 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2762 \begin_layout Standard
2763 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2768 \begin_layout Description
2769 Article for basic articles
2772 \begin_layout Description
2773 Report for basic reports
2776 \begin_layout Description
2777 Book for writing a book
2780 \begin_layout Description
2781 Letter for US-style letters
2784 \begin_layout Standard
2785 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2786 only uses if you have installed
2787 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2788 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2789 distributions will include
2791 Here are some of the classes.
2792 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2794 Special Document Classes
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2807 \begin_layout Description
2808 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2812 \begin_layout Description
2813 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2817 \begin_layout Description
2818 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2819 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2820 There are three article layouts available.
2821 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2822 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2823 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2824 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2829 sequential numbering
2830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2833 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2834 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2835 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2836 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2839 \begin_layout Description
2840 Beamer Layout for presentations
2843 \begin_layout Description
2844 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2845 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2846 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2847 with \SpecialChar LyX
2851 \begin_layout Description
2852 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2855 \begin_layout Description
2857 \begin_inset space ~
2860 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2863 \begin_layout Description
2864 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2867 \begin_layout Description
2868 Foils Used to make transparencies
2871 \begin_layout Description
2872 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2873 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2874 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2875 with \SpecialChar LyX
2879 \begin_layout Description
2880 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2881 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2884 \begin_layout Description
2885 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2888 \begin_layout Description
2889 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2892 \begin_layout Description
2893 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2894 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2895 (Is used by this document.)
2898 \begin_layout Description
2899 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2902 \begin_layout Description
2903 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2906 \begin_layout Description
2911 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2912 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2914 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2918 \begin_layout Description
2919 Slides Used to make transparencies
2922 \begin_layout Description
2924 \begin_inset space ~
2927 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2928 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2931 \begin_layout Description
2932 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2935 \begin_layout Standard
2936 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2938 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2944 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2945 of the document classes.
2948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2956 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2958 \begin_inset Index idx
2961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2979 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2981 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2984 \begin_layout Standard
2987 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2992 , are highly specialized.
2994 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2995 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2996 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2997 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2998 by some document class.
2999 There are just too many of them.
3000 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3003 \begin_layout Standard
3004 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3012 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3013 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3014 document class for a new file.
3016 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3021 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3030 manual for information on how to install them.
3031 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3037 \begin_layout Standard
3038 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3039 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3040 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3041 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 class files to be used for dissertation
3043 s submitted to those universities.
3044 The \SpecialChar LyX
3045 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3047 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3051 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3057 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3064 name "subsec:Modules"
3069 \begin_inset Index idx
3072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3081 \begin_layout Standard
3082 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3083 chosen document class.
3084 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3085 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3096 \begin_inset Index idx
3099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3106 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3110 \begin_layout Standard
3111 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3112 packages or file format converters that are not always
3113 installed by default.
3115 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3116 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3117 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3118 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3120 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3121 file without the missing prerequisites.
3122 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3123 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3126 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3130 \begin_inset Index idx
3133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3134 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3153 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3157 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3165 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3167 will advise you about these things.
3175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3179 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3184 \begin_inset Index idx
3187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3188 Document ! Local Layout
3196 \begin_layout Standard
3197 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3198 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3199 : They are intended to be used in
3200 a variety of different documents.
3201 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3202 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3203 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3204 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3205 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3207 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3225 manual for information on how to use it.
3228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3232 \begin_layout Standard
3233 Each class has a default set of options.
3234 Here's a quick table describing them:
3237 \begin_layout Standard
3238 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3244 \begin_layout Standard
3246 \begin_inset Tabular
3247 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3248 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3252 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3253 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 \begin_layout Standard
3708 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3714 \begin_layout Standard
3715 You're probably also wondering what
3716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3720 \begin_inset space ~
3724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3728 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3729 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3734 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3739 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3749 headings, there are also
3757 headings, and so on.
3758 We will describe these headings fully in section
3759 \begin_inset space ~
3763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3765 reference "subsec:Headings"
3772 \begin_layout Subsection
3774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3776 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3781 \begin_inset Index idx
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3791 \begin_inset Index idx
3794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3803 \begin_layout Standard
3804 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3806 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3813 \begin_inset space ~
3821 \begin_inset space ~
3826 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3828 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3829 doesn't support special options you want to
3830 use for your document.
3831 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3832 -class and its options, you have to read
3836 \begin_layout Standard
3840 \begin_inset space ~
3847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3853 \begin_inset space ~
3858 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3859 You can choose between the following five options:
3862 \begin_layout Labeling
3863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3868 Use default page style of current class.
3871 \begin_layout Labeling
3872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3877 No page numbers or headings.
3880 \begin_layout Labeling
3881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3889 \begin_layout Labeling
3890 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3895 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3896 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3897 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3898 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3901 \begin_layout Labeling
3902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3907 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3908 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3914 \begin_inset Index idx
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3919 -packages ! fancyhdr
3925 How they are defined is explained in section
3926 \begin_inset space ~
3930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3932 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3939 \begin_layout Standard
3940 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3941 \begin_inset space ~
3945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3947 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3954 \begin_layout Subsection
3955 Paper Size and Orientation
3956 \begin_inset Index idx
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3960 Document ! Paper size
3966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3968 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3975 \begin_layout Standard
3976 You can find the following options in the menu
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3990 \begin_inset Index idx
3993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4002 \begin_layout Labeling
4003 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4007 \begin_inset space ~
4012 What size paper to print on.
4017 \begin_layout Itemize
4023 \begin_layout Itemize
4029 \begin_layout Itemize
4035 \begin_layout Itemize
4041 \begin_layout Itemize
4044 US letter, US legal, US executive
4047 \begin_layout Itemize
4053 \begin_layout Itemize
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 To choose whether to output as
4077 \begin_layout Labeling
4078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4082 \begin_inset space ~
4087 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4088 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4091 \begin_layout Subsection
4093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4095 name "subsec:Margins"
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4110 \begin_inset Index idx
4113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4122 \begin_layout Standard
4123 Paper margins are set in the menu
4125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4129 \begin_inset Index idx
4132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4143 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4144 the paper format and the font size into account.
4147 \begin_layout Subsection
4151 \begin_layout Standard
4152 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4158 That includes the paragraph environments.
4159 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4160 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4161 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4163 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4172 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4174 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4175 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4176 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4179 \begin_layout Section
4180 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4181 \begin_inset Index idx
4184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4185 Paragraph ! Indentation
4193 \begin_layout Subsection
4195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4197 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4204 \begin_layout Standard
4205 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4206 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4209 \begin_layout Standard
4210 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4211 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4212 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4213 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4217 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4223 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4224 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4225 language than English.
4227 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4230 \begin_layout Standard
4231 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4232 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4233 into \SpecialChar LyX
4235 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4238 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4240 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4241 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4242 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4249 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4250 goes to produce a printable file.
4255 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4257 gives you the ability globally to change
4261 these pre-coded spacings.
4262 We will explain more later.
4265 \begin_layout Subsection
4266 Paragraph Separation
4267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4269 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4274 \begin_inset Index idx
4277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4278 Paragraph ! Separation
4286 \begin_layout Standard
4294 \begin_inset space ~
4302 \begin_inset space ~
4309 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4313 \begin_inset Index idx
4316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4322 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4325 \begin_layout Subsection
4329 \begin_layout Standard
4330 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4333 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4335 \begin_inset space ~
4340 dialog and toggle the
4343 \begin_inset space ~
4348 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4351 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4355 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4356 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4360 \begin_layout Standard
4361 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4362 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4365 \begin_layout Subsection
4367 \begin_inset Index idx
4370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4371 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4379 \begin_layout Standard
4382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4386 \begin_inset Index idx
4389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4398 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4402 \begin_inset space ~
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4418 \begin_inset Index idx
4421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4423 -packages ! setspace
4428 installed to use this feature.
4433 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4435 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4437 \begin_inset space ~
4442 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4443 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4446 \begin_layout Section
4447 Paragraph Environments
4448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4450 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4455 \begin_inset Index idx
4458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4459 Paragraph ! Environments
4465 \begin_inset Index idx
4468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4469 Paragraph environments|(
4477 \begin_layout Subsection
4481 \begin_layout Standard
4482 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4485 \begin_layout Standard
4504 \begin_inset Newline newline
4507 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4509 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4510 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4511 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4520 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4524 A paragraph environment is simply a
4525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4532 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4533 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4534 scheme, labels, and so on.
4535 Additionally, you can
4536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4543 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4544 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4545 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4546 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4548 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4550 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4553 \begin_layout Standard
4554 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4555 \begin_inset Graphics
4556 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4562 at the left end of the toolbar.
4564 will change the environment of the
4568 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4569 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4570 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4583 create a new paragraph using the
4587 paragraph environment.
4589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4596 because if you are in one of these environments:
4599 \begin_layout Itemize
4605 \begin_layout Itemize
4611 \begin_layout Itemize
4617 \begin_layout Itemize
4623 \begin_layout Itemize
4629 \begin_layout Itemize
4635 \begin_layout Itemize
4641 \begin_layout Standard
4643 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4647 , rather than resetting it to
4652 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4653 \begin_inset space ~
4657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4659 reference "sec:Nesting"
4666 \begin_layout Subsection
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 The default paragraph environment is
4676 It creates a plain paragraph.
4678 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4679 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4680 this manual) are in the
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 You can nest a paragraph using the
4692 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4700 \begin_layout Subsection
4702 \begin_inset Index idx
4705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4714 \begin_layout Standard
4715 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4716 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4725 for thanks or contact information.
4726 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4727 places all of this on a separate page
4728 along with today's date.
4729 For other types of documents, the title
4730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4737 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4741 \begin_layout Standard
4743 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4757 Here's how you use them:
4760 \begin_layout Itemize
4761 Put the title of your document in the
4768 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 Put the author name in the
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4778 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4784 Note that using this environment is optional.
4785 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4786 will automatically insert today's date.
4787 If you don't want a date, use the option
4789 Suppress default date on front page
4793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4794 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4796 \begin_inset space ~
4804 \begin_layout Standard
4805 You can use footnotes to insert
4806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4813 or contact information.
4816 \begin_layout Subsection
4818 \begin_inset Index idx
4821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4830 name "subsec:Headings"
4837 \begin_layout Standard
4838 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4840 takes care of the numbering for you.
4843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4845 \begin_inset Index idx
4848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4849 Section headings ! Numbered
4857 \begin_layout Standard
4858 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4862 \begin_layout Enumerate
4868 \begin_layout Enumerate
4874 \begin_layout Enumerate
4880 \begin_layout Enumerate
4886 \begin_layout Enumerate
4892 \begin_layout Enumerate
4898 \begin_layout Enumerate
4904 \begin_layout Standard
4906 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4907 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4908 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4911 \begin_layout Standard
4912 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4913 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4914 You group the book into chapters.
4916 does a similar grouping:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4924 is divided into either
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4947 \begin_layout Itemize
4959 \begin_layout Itemize
4971 \begin_layout Itemize
4983 \begin_layout Itemize
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5004 Not all document types use the
5008 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5013 is the top-level heading.
5021 \begin_layout Standard
5026 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5027 labels it with its number,
5028 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5030 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5042 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5044 \begin_inset Index idx
5047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5048 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5056 \begin_layout Standard
5057 The unnumbered section headings have a
5058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5065 at the end of their name.
5066 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5067 the table of contents, see section
5068 \begin_inset space ~
5072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5081 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5082 Changing the Numbering
5083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5085 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5092 \begin_layout Standard
5093 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5094 in the Table of Contents.
5095 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5097 Just as certain classes start with
5111 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5121 This is something you can change.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5131 \begin_inset Index idx
5134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5143 \begin_inset space ~
5147 \begin_inset space ~
5152 you will see two counters.
5157 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5158 numbers a section heading.
5159 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 Short Titles of Headings
5165 \begin_inset Index idx
5168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5169 Section headings ! Short titles
5175 \begin_inset Argument 1
5178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5187 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5194 \begin_layout Standard
5195 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5196 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5197 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5198 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5201 \begin_layout Standard
5203 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5204 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5205 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5206 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5211 \begin_inset space ~
5217 This will insert a box labeled
5218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5222 \begin_inset space ~
5226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5229 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5230 This also works for captions inside floats.
5231 There can only be one short title per title.
5234 \begin_layout Standard
5235 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5238 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5242 \begin_layout Standard
5243 The following information applies to all section headings:
5246 \begin_layout Itemize
5247 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5250 \begin_layout Itemize
5251 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5254 \begin_layout Itemize
5255 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5258 \begin_layout Itemize
5259 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5262 \begin_layout Subsection
5266 \begin_layout Standard
5268 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5282 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5283 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5284 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5285 the text they contain.
5286 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5294 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5297 \begin_layout Standard
5298 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5307 when you start a new paragraph.
5308 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5312 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5313 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5314 have to change back to the
5318 environment yourself.
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5330 \begin_inset Index idx
5333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5342 \begin_layout Standard
5343 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5344 time for the differences.
5353 are identical except for one difference:
5357 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5366 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5369 \begin_layout Standard
5370 Here's an example of the
5383 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5385 See – no indentation!
5389 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5390 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5391 the other paragraph.
5394 \begin_layout Standard
5395 Here's another example, this time in the
5402 \begin_layout Quotation
5408 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5409 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5410 the first line, then
5414 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5418 you were quoting other text.
5421 \begin_layout Quotation
5422 Here's a new paragraph.
5423 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5424 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5427 \begin_layout Standard
5428 As the examples show,
5432 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5433 They should put quotes in the
5438 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5442 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5445 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5447 \begin_inset Index idx
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5457 \begin_inset Index idx
5460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5476 \begin_layout Standard
5481 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5487 \begin_inset Newline newline
5490 Which I did not rehearse!
5494 It could be much worse.
5495 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5497 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5498 indented a bit more than the first.
5499 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5505 \begin_inset Newline newline
5508 And make things look fine
5509 \begin_inset Newline newline
5515 arg "newline-insert newline"
5521 \begin_layout Standard
5526 does not indent both margins.
5527 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5528 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5531 arg "newline-insert newline"
5537 \begin_layout Subsection
5539 \begin_inset Index idx
5542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5558 \begin_layout Standard
5560 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5570 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5571 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5580 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5581 lets you provide your own label.
5582 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5583 describing some general features of all four of them.
5586 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5590 \begin_layout Standard
5591 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5593 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5594 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5603 reset the environment to
5607 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5608 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5609 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5613 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5617 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5625 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5626 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5627 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5629 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5630 you read all of section
5631 \begin_inset space ~
5635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5637 reference "sec:Nesting"
5644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5646 \begin_inset Index idx
5649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5665 \begin_layout Standard
5666 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5670 paragraph environment.
5671 It has the following properties:
5674 \begin_layout Itemize
5675 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5684 \begin_layout Itemize
5685 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5689 \begin_layout Itemize
5690 The items can have any length.
5692 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5693 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5700 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 environment inside another
5709 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5713 \begin_layout Itemize
5714 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5717 \begin_layout Itemize
5719 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5722 \begin_layout Itemize
5724 \begin_inset space ~
5728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5730 reference "sec:Nesting"
5734 for a full explanation of nesting.
5738 \begin_layout Standard
5739 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5748 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5751 \begin_layout Standard
5752 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5753 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5756 \begin_layout Itemize
5757 The label for the first level
5761 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5765 \begin_layout Itemize
5766 The label for the second level is a dash.
5770 \begin_layout Itemize
5771 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5775 \begin_layout Itemize
5776 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5780 \begin_layout Itemize
5781 Back out to the third level.
5785 \begin_layout Itemize
5786 Back to the second level.
5790 \begin_layout Itemize
5791 Back to the outermost level.
5794 \begin_layout Standard
5795 These are the default labels for an
5800 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5805 dialog in the submenu
5810 \begin_inset Index idx
5813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5819 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5825 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5827 \begin_inset space ~
5831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5833 reference "sec:Nesting"
5840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5842 \begin_inset Index idx
5845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5854 name "sec:Enumerate"
5861 \begin_layout Standard
5866 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5867 It has these properties:
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5871 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5880 \begin_layout Enumerate
5882 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5890 environment resets the counter to one.
5893 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 \begin_layout Enumerate
5907 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5908 Items can have any length.
5911 \begin_layout Enumerate
5912 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5915 \begin_layout Enumerate
5916 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5919 \begin_layout Enumerate
5920 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5924 \begin_layout Standard
5933 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5935 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5936 labels the four different levels in an
5943 \begin_layout Enumerate
5944 The first level of an
5948 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5952 \begin_layout Enumerate
5953 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5957 \begin_layout Enumerate
5958 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5962 \begin_layout Enumerate
5963 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5966 \begin_layout Enumerate
5967 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5972 \begin_layout Enumerate
5973 Back to the third level
5977 \begin_layout Enumerate
5978 Back to the second level.
5982 \begin_layout Enumerate
5983 Back to the outermost level.
5986 \begin_layout Standard
5987 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5991 environment, see section
5992 \begin_inset space ~
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5998 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6003 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6007 \begin_layout Standard
6008 There is more to nesting
6012 environments than we've stated here.
6013 You should read section
6014 \begin_inset space ~
6018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6020 reference "sec:Nesting"
6024 to learn more about nesting.
6027 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6029 \begin_inset Index idx
6032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6041 \begin_layout Standard
6042 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6046 list has no fixed label.
6047 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6056 of the first line as the label.
6060 \begin_layout Description
6061 Example: This is an example of the
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6070 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6074 \begin_layout Standard
6076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6083 it is meant that the first usage of the
6087 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6089 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6097 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6103 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6105 \begin_inset space ~
6111 \begin_inset space ~
6115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6117 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6121 for more information.) Here is an example:
6124 \begin_layout Description
6126 \begin_inset space ~
6129 Example: This one shows how to use a
6132 \begin_inset space ~
6144 \begin_layout Description
6145 Usage: You should use the
6149 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6150 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6152 It's not a good idea to use a
6156 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6157 You're better off using
6169 paragraphs into them.
6172 \begin_layout Description
6173 Nesting: You can nest
6177 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6181 \begin_layout Standard
6182 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6183 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6184 them from the first line.
6187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6189 \begin_inset Index idx
6192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6206 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6207 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6211 \begin_layout Standard
6220 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6222 Here are its properties:
6225 \begin_layout Labeling
6226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6228 \begin_inset space ~
6231 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6240 of each line as the item label.
6245 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6246 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6247 space as described above.
6250 \begin_layout Labeling
6251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6252 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6253 uses different margins for the item label and the
6254 body of the item text.
6255 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6256 label width plus a little extra space.
6260 \begin_layout Labeling
6261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6266 width \SpecialChar LyX
6267 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6268 If the label width is larger, the label
6269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6276 into the first line.
6277 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6278 margin of the rest of the item text.
6281 \begin_layout Labeling
6282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6292 environment has the same left margin.
6293 \begin_inset Newline newline
6296 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6299 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6301 \begin_inset space ~
6306 dialog (toolbar button
6309 arg "layout-paragraph"
6316 \begin_inset space ~
6321 determines the default label width.
6322 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6331 multiple times instead.
6332 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6342 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6345 \begin_inset space ~
6350 every time you alter a label in a
6355 \begin_inset Newline newline
6358 The predefined default width is the length of
6359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6367 \begin_inset space ~
6373 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list the same way as the
6382 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6388 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6392 \begin_layout Standard
6397 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6398 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6400 \begin_inset space ~
6404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6406 reference "sec:Nesting"
6410 to learn about nesting.
6413 \begin_layout Standard
6414 There is yet another feature of the
6418 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6419 left-justifies the item labels by
6421 You can use additional
6425 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6426 justifies the item label.
6431 are documented in section
6432 \begin_inset space ~
6436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6438 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6443 Here are some examples:
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6448 Left The default for
6455 \begin_layout Labeling
6456 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6464 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6467 \begin_layout Labeling
6468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6469 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6473 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6480 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6483 \begin_layout Subsection
6485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6487 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6492 \begin_inset Index idx
6495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6504 \begin_layout Standard
6505 The features described in this section require that the module
6507 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6509 is loaded in the document settings.
6510 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6516 \begin_inset Index idx
6519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6521 -packages ! enumitem
6529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6530 Custom Enumerate Lists
6531 \begin_inset Index idx
6534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6535 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6543 \begin_layout Standard
6545 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6551 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6552 There you add the command
6555 \begin_layout Standard
6563 \begin_layout Standard
6575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6576 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6577 Code, look at section
6578 \begin_inset space ~
6582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6584 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6597 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6604 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6605 For capital Roman numerals replace
6617 in the command above.
6618 For Arabic numerals use
6626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6633 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6648 \begin_layout Standard
6650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6658 You can only number 26
6659 \begin_inset space ~
6662 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6670 \begin_layout Standard
6671 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6672 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6675 \begin_layout Standard
6676 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6679 \begin_layout Enumerate
6680 \begin_inset Argument 1
6683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6709 \begin_layout Enumerate
6710 \begin_inset Argument 1
6713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6736 \begin_layout Enumerate
6741 \begin_layout Enumerate
6742 \begin_inset Argument 1
6745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6769 \begin_layout Enumerate
6770 \begin_inset Argument 1
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6799 \begin_layout Standard
6800 For this list these commands were used:
6803 \begin_layout Standard
6814 \begin_inset Newline newline
6822 \begin_inset Newline newline
6830 \begin_inset Newline newline
6840 \begin_layout Standard
6847 makes the label emphasized and
6856 \begin_layout Standard
6857 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6865 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6866 lists until you change the definition.
6874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6876 \begin_inset Index idx
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6880 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6888 \begin_layout Standard
6889 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6892 \begin_layout Enumerate
6893 \begin_inset Argument 1
6896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_inset Note Note
6918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6919 goes back to default numbering
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6931 \begin_layout Standard
6935 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6939 \begin_layout Standard
6940 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6945 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6946 to indicate that it is a resumed
6947 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6948 , but in the output.
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6952 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6960 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6970 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6972 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6973 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6974 of a normal enumeration.
6975 There, insert the command
6978 \begin_layout Standard
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6989 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6993 \begin_layout Enumerate
6997 \begin_layout Enumerate
7001 \begin_layout Standard
7002 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7005 \begin_layout Enumerate
7006 \begin_inset Argument 1
7009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7025 This enumeration starts at 4
7028 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7030 \begin_inset Index idx
7033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7042 \begin_layout Standard
7043 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7045 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7048 \begin_layout Itemize
7052 \begin_layout Itemize
7053 with standard spacing
7056 \begin_layout Standard
7057 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7059 Add there the command
7063 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7066 \begin_layout Itemize
7067 \begin_inset Argument 1
7070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7089 \begin_layout Itemize
7093 \begin_layout Itemize
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7105 \begin_inset Index idx
7108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7110 -packages ! enumitem
7116 For more information see its documentation,
7117 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7126 \begin_layout Standard
7127 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7129 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7130 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7134 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7138 \begin_inset Argument 1
7141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7149 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 with negative indentation
7166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7167 Further Customization
7168 \begin_inset Index idx
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 Lists ! Customization
7180 \begin_layout Standard
7181 You can also change the style of description lists.
7185 \begin_layout Standard
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 changes the description label font, the command
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 sets the list style.
7205 \begin_layout Standard
7206 An example where the command
7209 \begin_layout Standard
7214 itshape, style=nextline
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7221 \begin_layout Description
7223 \begin_inset space ~
7227 \begin_inset Argument 1
7230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7236 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7238 itshape, style=nextline
7248 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7249 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7253 \begin_layout Description
7255 \begin_inset space ~
7258 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7259 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7260 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7263 \begin_layout Standard
7264 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7270 \begin_inset Index idx
7273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 -packages ! enumitem
7281 For more information see its documentation
7282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7291 \begin_layout Subsection
7293 \begin_inset Index idx
7296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7307 \begin_inset space ~
7310 Address: An Overview
7313 \begin_layout Standard
7314 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7315 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7323 \begin_inset space ~
7329 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7330 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7331 gags on the document.
7332 In contrast, you can use the
7339 \begin_inset space ~
7344 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7345 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 Of course, you're not limited to using
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7366 \begin_inset space ~
7371 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7372 some European academic papers.
7375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7379 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7386 \begin_layout Standard
7391 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7392 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7396 \begin_inset space ~
7401 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7402 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7403 Here's an example of each:
7406 \begin_layout Right Address
7408 \begin_inset Newline newline
7412 \begin_inset Newline newline
7416 \begin_inset Newline newline
7419 When is it? What is today?
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7426 \begin_inset space ~
7432 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7434 the largest block of text on a single line.
7435 Here's an example of the
7442 \begin_layout Address
7444 \begin_inset Newline newline
7447 Where do I send this
7448 \begin_inset Newline newline
7451 Your post office and country
7454 \begin_layout Standard
7455 As you can see, both
7462 \begin_inset space ~
7467 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7472 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7473 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7479 This makes sense, since
7487 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7488 Thus, you have to use
7495 arg "newline-insert newline"
7500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7501 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7503 \begin_inset space ~
7507 \begin_inset space ~
7512 ) to start a new line in an
7519 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_layout Subsection
7531 \begin_layout Standard
7532 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7533 or list of references.
7535 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7540 \begin_inset Index idx
7543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7552 \begin_layout Standard
7557 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7558 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7559 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7560 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7574 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7575 The book document classes ignores the
7579 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7583 in a letter document class.
7586 \begin_layout Standard
7591 environment does several things for you.
7592 First, it puts the centered label
7593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7601 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7603 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7604 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7605 the subsequent text.
7606 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7608 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7612 \begin_layout Standard
7613 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7617 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7618 The new paragraph will still be in the
7623 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7624 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7627 \begin_layout Standard
7628 \begin_inset Float figure
7633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7635 \begin_inset Graphics
7636 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7644 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7649 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7670 \begin_layout Standard
7671 We would love to demonstrate the
7675 environment, but since this document is in the
7676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7683 class, we can't do this.
7684 We inserted it therefore as figure
7685 \begin_inset space ~
7689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7691 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7696 If you have never heard of an
7697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7704 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7707 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7709 \begin_inset Index idx
7712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7721 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7728 \begin_layout Standard
7733 environment is used to list references.
7734 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7735 only use it at the end of the document.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7748 When you first open a
7752 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7753 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7769 depending on the document class.
7770 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7771 Each paragraph of the
7775 environment is a bibliography entry.
7780 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7781 Each new paragraph is still in the
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7790 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7792 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7794 handling, have a look at section
7795 \begin_inset space ~
7799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7801 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7808 \begin_layout Subsection
7809 Special Environments
7812 \begin_layout Standard
7814 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7815 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7818 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7823 \begin_inset Index idx
7826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7836 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7843 \begin_layout Standard
7849 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7851 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7856 key as a fixed whitespace.
7860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7873 \begin_inset space ~
7878 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7892 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7895 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7898 arg "newline-insert newline"
7915 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7916 So, when you finish using the
7921 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7922 Also, you can nest the
7927 environment inside of others.
7930 \begin_layout Standard
7931 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7934 \begin_layout Itemize
7938 arg "newline-insert newline"
7941 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7946 \begin_inset space \space{}
7956 arg "newline-insert newline"
7962 \begin_layout Itemize
7966 arg "newline-insert newline"
7976 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7982 \begin_layout Itemize
7983 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7984 You must put at least one
7988 in any line you want blank.
7989 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7993 \begin_layout Itemize
7994 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7998 since that will insert
8003 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8006 arg "self-insert \""
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8016 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8020 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8024 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8028 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8032 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8033 printf("Hello World!
8038 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8042 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8046 \begin_layout Standard
8047 This is just the standard
8048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8059 \begin_layout Standard
8065 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8067 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8068 as if you used a typewriter.
8069 \begin_inset Index idx
8072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8073 Paragraph environments|)
8078 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8081 Program Code Listings
8086 \begin_inset space ~
8094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8098 \begin_inset Index idx
8101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8110 \begin_layout Standard
8115 environment is similar to the
8120 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8121 computer console text.
8126 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8140 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8141 you can have empty lines.
8154 \begin_layout Itemize
8155 have a certain language and a text style
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8160 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8161 and \SpecialChar TeX
8165 \begin_layout Standard
8166 Because of these properties
8170 works like a typewriter.
8174 \begin_layout Verbatim
8178 \begin_layout Verbatim
8181 The following 2 lines are empty:
8184 \begin_layout Verbatim
8188 \begin_layout Verbatim
8192 \begin_layout Verbatim
8193 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8198 \begin_layout Section
8199 Nesting Environments
8200 \begin_inset Index idx
8203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8204 Nesting ! Environments
8210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8219 \begin_layout Subsection
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8225 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8227 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8229 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8231 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8243 \begin_layout Enumerate
8247 \begin_layout Enumerate
8252 \begin_layout Enumerate
8256 \begin_layout Enumerate
8261 \begin_layout Enumerate
8265 \begin_layout Standard
8266 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8267 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8269 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8271 \begin_inset space ~
8275 \begin_inset space ~
8283 \begin_inset space ~
8287 \begin_inset space ~
8292 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8294 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8297 arg "depth-increment"
8303 arg "depth-decrement"
8317 arg "depth-increment"
8323 arg "depth-decrement"
8327 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8328 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8332 \begin_layout Standard
8333 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8334 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8335 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8336 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8337 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8340 \begin_layout Standard
8341 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8343 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8345 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8348 \begin_layout Subsection
8349 What You Can and Can't Nest
8352 \begin_layout Standard
8353 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8354 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8357 \begin_layout Standard
8358 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8359 than a simple yes or no.
8360 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8363 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 Completely unnestable
8367 \begin_layout Itemize
8368 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8372 \begin_layout Itemize
8373 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8377 \begin_layout Standard
8378 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8379 environments have them:
8382 \begin_layout Description
8383 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8384 Can't nest into them.
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 \begin_layout Itemize
8406 \begin_layout Itemize
8412 \begin_layout Itemize
8419 \begin_layout Description
8421 \begin_inset space ~
8424 Nestable You can nest them.
8425 You can nest other things into them.
8429 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_layout Itemize
8441 \begin_layout Itemize
8447 \begin_layout Itemize
8453 \begin_layout Itemize
8459 \begin_layout Itemize
8465 \begin_layout Itemize
8471 \begin_layout Itemize
8478 \begin_layout Itemize
8485 \begin_layout Description
8486 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8487 You can't nest anything into them.
8491 \begin_layout Itemize
8497 \begin_layout Itemize
8503 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 \begin_layout Itemize
8515 \begin_layout Itemize
8521 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 \begin_layout Itemize
8533 \begin_layout Itemize
8539 \begin_layout Itemize
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_inset space ~
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8586 \begin_layout Standard
8587 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8595 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8605 \begin_inset space ~
8608 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8609 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8610 nested section headings violate this.
8618 \begin_layout Subsection
8619 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8620 \begin_inset Index idx
8623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8624 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8632 \begin_layout Standard
8633 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8634 affected by nesting anyhow.
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8646 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Standard
8652 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8660 Figures and tables in
8664 are not affected by this.
8669 Have a look at section
8670 \begin_inset space ~
8674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8676 reference "sec:Floats"
8680 for more information about
8687 \begin_layout Standard
8689 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8690 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8694 \begin_layout Standard
8695 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8703 of its own, it behaves just like a
8704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8711 paragraph environment.
8712 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8716 \begin_layout Standard
8717 Here's an example with a table:
8720 \begin_layout Enumerate
8725 \begin_layout Enumerate
8726 This is (a) and it's nested.
8730 \begin_layout Standard
8731 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8737 \begin_layout Standard
8739 \begin_inset Tabular
8740 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8741 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8835 \begin_layout Enumerate
8837 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8841 \begin_layout Enumerate
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8846 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8849 \begin_layout Enumerate
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8855 This is (a) and it's nested.
8859 \begin_layout Standard
8860 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8868 \begin_inset Tabular
8869 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8870 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8871 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8872 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 \begin_layout Standard
8957 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8963 \begin_layout Enumerate
8970 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8973 \begin_layout Enumerate
8977 \begin_layout Standard
8978 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8983 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8986 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8989 \begin_layout Enumerate
8994 \begin_layout Enumerate
8995 This is (a) and it's nested.
8998 \begin_layout Standard
8999 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9005 \begin_layout Standard
9007 \begin_inset Tabular
9008 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9009 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9010 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9011 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9096 \begin_layout Standard
9097 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9103 \begin_layout Enumerate
9105 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9112 \begin_layout Enumerate
9116 \begin_layout Standard
9117 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9123 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9124 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9128 \begin_layout Subsection
9129 Usage and General Features
9132 \begin_layout Standard
9133 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9134 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9143 is the innermost possible depth.
9144 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9147 \begin_layout Enumerate
9148 level #1 – outermost
9152 \begin_layout Enumerate
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 \begin_layout Enumerate
9167 \begin_layout Itemize
9172 \begin_layout Itemize
9181 \begin_layout Standard
9182 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9183 both of them in the example.
9184 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9194 For example, if we tried to nest another
9199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9206 , we would get errors.
9209 \begin_layout Subsection
9211 \begin_inset Index idx
9214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9223 \begin_layout Standard
9224 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9225 We have several examples of nested environments.
9226 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9230 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9231 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9234 \begin_layout Labeling
9235 \labelwidthstring MMM
9236 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9245 \begin_layout Labeling
9246 \labelwidthstring MMM
9247 #2-a This is level #2.
9248 We created it by using
9251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9257 arg "depth-increment"
9264 \begin_layout Labeling
9265 \labelwidthstring MMM
9266 #3-a This is level #3.
9267 This time, we just enter
9274 arg "depth-increment"
9278 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9282 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9288 arg "depth-increment"
9295 \begin_layout Standard
9300 environment, nested inside of
9301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9309 So, it's at level #4.
9310 We did this by entering
9313 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9319 arg "depth-increment"
9322 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9327 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9343 \begin_layout Standard
9348 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9351 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9357 \begin_layout Labeling
9358 \labelwidthstring MMM
9359 #4-a This is level #4.
9363 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9366 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9371 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9375 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9380 keep nesting things inside
9381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9392 \begin_layout Labeling
9393 \labelwidthstring MMM
9394 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9399 \begin_layout Labeling
9400 \labelwidthstring MMM
9401 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9402 and this is level #6.
9403 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9407 \begin_layout Labeling
9408 \labelwidthstring MMM
9409 #5-b Back to level #5.
9413 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9419 arg "depth-decrement"
9426 \begin_layout Labeling
9427 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9437 arg "depth-decrement"
9440 , we're back at level #4.
9444 \begin_layout Labeling
9445 \labelwidthstring MMM
9446 #3-b Back to level #3.
9447 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9451 \begin_layout Labeling
9452 \labelwidthstring MMM
9453 #2-b Back to level #2.
9458 \begin_layout Labeling
9459 \labelwidthstring MMM
9460 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9461 After this sentence, we will enter
9465 and change the paragraph environment back to
9472 \begin_layout Standard
9473 We could have also used the
9489 environment in place of the
9494 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9497 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9498 Example 2: Inheritance
9501 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9502 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9505 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9514 arg "depth-increment"
9518 \begin_inset Newline newline
9521 which, we will change to the
9529 \begin_layout Enumerate
9534 environment, at level #2.
9537 \begin_layout Enumerate
9538 Notice how the nested
9542 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9546 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9550 \begin_layout Standard
9551 We ended this example by entering
9556 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9560 and reset the nesting depth by using
9563 arg "depth-decrement"
9569 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9570 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9579 \begin_inset Argument 1
9582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9583 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9591 \begin_layout Enumerate
9592 This is level #1, in an
9596 paragraph environment.
9597 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9601 \begin_layout Enumerate
9606 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9612 arg "depth-increment"
9616 Now, what happens if we nest an
9620 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9621 label be? An asterisk?
9625 \begin_layout Itemize
9635 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9636 So, its label is a bullet.
9637 (We got here by using
9640 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9646 arg "depth-increment"
9649 , then changing the environment to
9657 \begin_layout Itemize
9658 Here's level #4, produced using
9661 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9667 arg "depth-increment"
9671 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9676 \begin_layout Enumerate
9679 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9684 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9688 , because we are in the
9696 environment (that is, it is an
9711 \begin_layout Enumerate
9716 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9717 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9721 \begin_layout Enumerate
9722 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9725 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9728 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9731 \begin_layout Enumerate
9735 arg "depth-decrement"
9738 to decrease the depth after the next
9741 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9748 \begin_layout Enumerate
9750 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9755 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9758 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9762 \begin_layout Enumerate
9763 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9772 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9777 reset the counter for the label.
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9791 arg "depth-decrement"
9794 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9795 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9796 into the twofold-nested
9804 \begin_layout Enumerate
9805 The same thing happens if we do another
9808 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9814 arg "depth-decrement"
9817 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9820 \begin_layout Standard
9821 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9826 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9841 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9848 The same rule applies for the
9852 environment, as well.
9855 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9856 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9859 \begin_layout Enumerate
9860 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9861 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9862 the same detail with how we did it.
9871 \begin_layout Standard
9879 arg "depth-increment"
9886 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9887 the example in parentheses someplace.
9888 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9889 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9890 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9894 \begin_layout Enumerate
9899 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9904 Now we will add verse.
9905 \begin_inset Newline newline
9908 It will get much worse.
9909 \begin_inset Newline newline
9919 arg "depth-increment"
9930 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9931 \begin_inset Newline newline
9934 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9935 \begin_inset Newline newline
9941 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9954 \begin_layout Standard
9955 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9961 \begin_layout Standard
9963 \begin_inset Tabular
9964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9965 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10052 \begin_layout Verse
10056 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10066 arg "depth-increment"
10072 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10078 \begin_inset Newline newline
10086 arg "depth-decrement"
10093 \begin_layout Enumerate
10098 : level #1) This is another item.
10099 Note that selecting a
10103 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10104 3 times to put the table inside the
10112 \begin_layout Quotation
10113 We're now ending the
10117 list and changing to
10122 We're still at level #1.
10123 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10124 The next set of paragraphs is a
10125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10132 We will nest both the
10139 \begin_inset space ~
10144 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10148 for the letter body.
10152 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10155 to preserve the depth.
10156 Remember that you need to use
10159 arg "newline-insert newline"
10162 to create multiple lines inside the
10169 \begin_inset space ~
10179 \begin_layout Right Address
10181 \begin_inset Newline newline
10184 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10185 \begin_inset Newline newline
10191 \begin_layout Address
10193 \begin_inset space ~
10199 \begin_layout Quotation
10200 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10204 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10205 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10206 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10207 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10208 as soon as possible.
10209 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10212 \begin_layout Quotation
10213 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10214 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10215 with your order, along with payment.
10218 \begin_layout Quotation
10219 We thank you again for your patience.
10222 \begin_layout Address
10224 \begin_inset Newline newline
10231 \begin_layout Quotation
10232 That ends that example!
10235 \begin_layout Standard
10236 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10237 gives you a lot of power with just
10239 We could have easily nested an
10260 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10263 \begin_layout Subsection
10265 \begin_inset Index idx
10268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10269 Nesting ! Separation
10275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10277 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10284 \begin_layout Standard
10285 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10287 For example you need two different enumerations:
10290 \begin_layout Enumerate
10295 \begin_layout Enumerate
10300 \begin_layout Enumerate
10304 \begin_layout Standard
10305 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10311 \begin_layout Itemize
10317 \begin_layout Standard
10318 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10324 \begin_layout Enumerate
10328 \begin_layout Enumerate
10332 \begin_layout Enumerate
10336 \begin_layout Standard
10337 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10338 list item and use the menu
10340 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10341 Start New Environment
10344 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10346 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10349 arg "paragraph-break"
10353 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10354 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10355 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10356 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10359 \begin_layout Standard
10360 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10363 arg "paragraph-break"
10366 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10369 \begin_layout Section
10370 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10371 \begin_inset Index idx
10374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10383 \begin_layout Standard
10384 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10385 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10387 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10388 be broken at the end of a line.
10389 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10393 \begin_layout Subsection
10395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10397 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10402 \begin_inset Index idx
10405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10414 \begin_layout Standard
10415 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10416 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10417 ) not to break the line at
10419 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10422 \begin_layout Quote
10423 Further documentation is given in section
10424 \begin_inset Newline newline
10428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10430 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10438 \begin_layout Standard
10439 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10454 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10463 A protected space is set with
10465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10466 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10468 \begin_inset space ~
10476 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10482 \begin_layout Subsection
10484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10486 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10491 \begin_inset Index idx
10494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10495 Spacing ! Horizontal
10503 \begin_layout Standard
10504 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10507 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10511 The length units are listed in Appendix
10512 \begin_inset space ~
10516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10518 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10529 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10534 \begin_inset Index idx
10537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10538 Spaces ! Inter-word
10546 \begin_layout Standard
10547 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10548 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10549 at the ends of sentences.
10550 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10551 automatically takes care about this.
10552 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10553 followed by a period; see section
10554 \begin_inset space ~
10558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10560 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10565 To insert a normal space, select
10567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10568 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10570 \begin_inset space ~
10578 arg "space-insert normal"
10584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10588 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10593 \begin_inset Index idx
10596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10605 \begin_layout Standard
10607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10614 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10623 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10624 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10625 inside abbreviations:
10628 \begin_layout Quote
10630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10634 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 or between values and units.
10639 Compare for example this:
10640 \begin_inset Newline newline
10644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10648 \begin_inset Newline newline
10651 10 kg (normal space
10654 \begin_layout Standard
10655 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10658 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10660 \begin_inset space ~
10668 arg "space-insert thin"
10674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10679 You can also insert the following space types:
10682 \begin_layout Description
10684 \begin_inset space ~
10688 \begin_inset space ~
10691 space A line with a
10692 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10696 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10700 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10703 negative thin space between the arrows.
10706 \begin_layout Description
10708 \begin_inset space ~
10712 \begin_inset space ~
10715 space A line with a
10716 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10720 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10724 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10727 negative medium space between the arrows.
10730 \begin_layout Description
10732 \begin_inset space ~
10736 \begin_inset space ~
10739 space A line with a
10740 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10744 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10748 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10751 negative thick space between the arrows.
10754 \begin_layout Description
10756 \begin_inset space ~
10760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10764 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10768 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10772 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10776 \begin_inset space ~
10780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10783 em) space between the arrows.
10786 \begin_layout Description
10788 \begin_inset space ~
10792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10796 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10800 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10804 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10808 \begin_inset space ~
10812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10815 em) space between the arrows.
10818 \begin_layout Description
10820 \begin_inset space ~
10824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10828 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10832 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10836 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10840 \begin_inset space ~
10844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 em) space between the arrows.
10850 \begin_layout Description
10852 \begin_inset space ~
10856 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10860 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10865 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10872 cm space between the arrows.
10875 \begin_layout Standard
10877 \begin_inset space ~
10881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10883 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10887 lists the different space sizes.
10890 \begin_layout Standard
10891 \begin_inset Float table
10896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10897 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10902 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10906 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10916 \begin_inset Tabular
10917 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10918 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10920 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11195 \begin_inset Index idx
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_layout Standard
11208 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11209 feature for adding extra space
11210 in a uniform fashion.
11211 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11212 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11213 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11214 equally between themselves.
11217 \begin_layout Standard
11218 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11221 \begin_layout Quote
11223 This is on the left side
11224 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11227 This is on the right
11230 \begin_layout Quote
11233 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11237 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11243 \begin_layout Quote
11246 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11250 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11254 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11260 \begin_layout Standard
11261 That was an example in the
11267 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11271 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11275 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11278 is one in a standard paragraph.
11279 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11283 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11286 \begin_layout Standard
11287 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11290 \begin_inset space ~
11295 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11298 \begin_layout Standard
11300 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11304 \begin_inset space ~
11310 \begin_layout Standard
11312 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11316 \begin_inset space ~
11322 \begin_layout Standard
11324 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11328 \begin_inset space ~
11334 \begin_layout Standard
11336 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11340 \begin_inset space ~
11346 \begin_layout Standard
11348 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11352 \begin_inset space ~
11358 \begin_layout Standard
11360 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11364 \begin_inset space ~
11370 \begin_layout Standard
11371 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11379 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11383 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11385 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11386 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11390 option in the space dialog.
11398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11402 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11407 \begin_inset Index idx
11410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11419 \begin_layout Standard
11420 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11421 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11424 \begin_layout Standard
11425 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11428 What is correct English?:
11429 \begin_inset Newline newline
11433 \begin_inset Newline newline
11437 \begin_inset space ~
11440 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11441 \begin_inset Newline newline
11445 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11456 \begin_inset Newline newline
11460 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11471 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11477 \begin_layout Standard
11479 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11484 \begin_inset space ~
11488 \begin_inset space ~
11492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11496 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11503 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_inset space ~
11517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11520 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11529 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11530 That is why it is named
11531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11539 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11540 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11544 \begin_layout Subsection
11546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11548 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11553 \begin_inset Index idx
11556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11565 \begin_layout Standard
11566 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11569 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11571 \begin_inset space ~
11577 There you find the following sizes:
11580 \begin_layout Standard
11593 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11594 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11599 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11602 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11604 \begin_inset space ~
11610 \begin_inset Index idx
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11614 Document ! Settings
11619 for the paragraph separation.
11620 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11631 \begin_layout Standard
11637 \begin_inset Index idx
11640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11646 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11647 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11652 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11653 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11662 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11671 s are described in section
11672 \begin_inset space ~
11676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11678 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11687 If there are several
11691 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11692 You can therefore use
11696 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11699 \begin_layout Standard
11704 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11705 \begin_inset space ~
11709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11711 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11718 \begin_layout Standard
11719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11729 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11730 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11742 \begin_layout Subsection
11743 Paragraph Alignment
11744 \begin_inset Index idx
11747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11748 Paragraph ! Alignment
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11757 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11759 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11762 dialog (toolbar button
11765 arg "layout-paragraph"
11769 There are five possibilities:
11772 \begin_layout Itemize
11780 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11786 \begin_layout Itemize
11794 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11800 \begin_layout Itemize
11808 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11814 \begin_layout Itemize
11822 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11828 \begin_layout Itemize
11836 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11842 \begin_layout Standard
11843 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11844 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11845 the left and right margins.
11846 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11849 \begin_layout Standard
11851 This paragraph is right aligned,
11854 \begin_layout Standard
11856 this one is centered,
11859 \begin_layout Standard
11861 this one is left aligned.
11864 \begin_layout Subsection
11866 \begin_inset Index idx
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 Page breaks ! Forced
11876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11878 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11885 \begin_layout Standard
11886 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11887 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11888 force a page break where you want one.
11889 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11890 is good at page breaking.
11891 Only if you use a lot of
11895 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11896 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11899 \begin_layout Standard
11900 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11901 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11905 have to change the page breaking.
11908 \begin_layout Standard
11909 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11911 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11914 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11916 \begin_inset space ~
11922 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11925 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11927 \begin_inset space ~
11932 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11934 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11935 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11938 \begin_layout Standard
11939 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11940 at the top of a page.
11941 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11943 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11944 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11945 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11949 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11953 to learn more about
11960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11964 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11969 \begin_inset Index idx
11972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11973 Page breaks ! Clear
11981 \begin_layout Standard
11982 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11983 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11984 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11985 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11986 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11989 \begin_layout Standard
11990 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11993 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11995 \begin_inset space ~
12001 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12004 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12006 \begin_inset space ~
12010 \begin_inset space ~
12015 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12016 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12019 \begin_layout Subsection
12021 \begin_inset Index idx
12024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12033 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12040 \begin_layout Standard
12041 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12043 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12045 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12046 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12048 \begin_inset space ~
12052 \begin_inset space ~
12060 arg "newline-insert newline"
12064 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12067 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12069 \begin_inset space ~
12073 \begin_inset space ~
12081 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12084 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12086 This is useful to avoid
12087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12094 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12097 \begin_layout Standard
12098 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12101 very good at line breaking.
12102 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12103 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12104 \begin_inset space ~
12108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12110 reference "sec:Quote"
12115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12117 reference "sec:Verse"
12122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12124 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12131 \begin_layout Subsection
12133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12135 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12140 \begin_inset Index idx
12143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12152 \begin_layout Standard
12154 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12165 \begin_layout Standard
12169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12170 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12172 \begin_inset space ~
12177 you can insert horizontal lines.
12178 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12179 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12180 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12185 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12196 \begin_layout Section
12197 Characters and Symbols
12200 \begin_layout Standard
12201 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12202 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12203 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12211 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12215 for information on how this is done.
12218 \begin_layout Standard
12219 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12224 dialog via the menu
12226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12227 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12233 \begin_layout Standard
12234 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12242 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12243 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12245 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12253 \begin_layout Section
12254 Fonts and Text Styles
12255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12257 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12264 \begin_layout Subsection
12266 \begin_inset Index idx
12269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12278 \begin_layout Standard
12279 There are two types of fonts:
12282 \begin_layout Description
12284 \begin_inset space ~
12288 \begin_inset Index idx
12291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12297 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12302 characters) in the font.
12303 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12304 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12305 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12306 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12307 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12308 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12309 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12310 \begin_inset Newline newline
12313 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12314 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12315 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12316 sizes than at small ones.
12317 \begin_inset Newline newline
12331 \begin_inset space ~
12339 \begin_layout Description
12341 \begin_inset space ~
12345 \begin_inset Index idx
12348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12354 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12355 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12356 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12357 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12358 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12359 image manipulation program.
12360 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12361 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12362 \begin_inset space ~
12365 pixels high up to 34
12366 \begin_inset space ~
12369 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12370 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12371 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12373 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12374 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12375 \begin_inset Newline newline
12378 Bitmap fonts are named
12381 \begin_inset space ~
12386 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12390 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12391 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12392 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12393 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12394 use scalable fonts.
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12398 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12402 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12403 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12404 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12405 font to emphasize text, you use an
12406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12414 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12416 In \SpecialChar LyX
12417 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12421 \begin_layout Subsection
12424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12426 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12433 \begin_layout Standard
12434 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12435 used its own fonts.
12436 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12437 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12440 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12441 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12442 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12443 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12444 to a word processor.
12445 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12446 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12447 files are very portable across
12448 different machines.
12449 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12450 has increased a lot
12451 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12454 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12456 \begin_inset space ~
12460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12462 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12467 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12468 code in the document
12469 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12472 \begin_layout Standard
12473 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12474 engines that are also able directly
12475 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12477 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12479 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12481 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12482 that is installed on your system.
12483 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12486 \begin_layout Standard
12487 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12495 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12496 es; so you might have to experiment.
12504 \begin_layout Standard
12505 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12514 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12515 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12516 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12517 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12526 \begin_layout Subsection
12527 Document Font and Font size
12528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12530 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12535 \begin_inset Index idx
12538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12545 \begin_inset Index idx
12548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 \begin_layout Standard
12558 You can set the document fonts in the
12560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12564 \begin_inset Index idx
12567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12568 Document ! Settings
12578 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12579 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12591 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12593 \begin_inset space ~
12596 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12604 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12605 This requires that you use
12617 as the output format, i.
12618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12622 \begin_inset space \space{}
12625 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12626 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12627 installed (see section
12628 \begin_inset space ~
12632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12634 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12639 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12641 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12642 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12644 \begin_inset space ~
12647 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12648 cannot determine the family.
12649 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12650 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12653 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12656 \begin_layout Standard
12657 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12658 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12663 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12669 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12670 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12678 \begin_inset space ~
12684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12697 European Computer Modern
12700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12707 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12710 \begin_layout Standard
12719 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12720 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12725 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12728 \begin_inset space ~
12733 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12739 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12740 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12743 \begin_layout Itemize
12747 \begin_inset space ~
12752 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12765 \begin_inset space ~
12770 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12771 community in order to replace
12775 as the default font.
12776 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12777 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12794 One difference is improved kerning.
12802 \begin_layout Itemize
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12815 fonts in (the rare) case that
12818 \begin_inset space ~
12823 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12838 Virtual means that it
12839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12850 -glyphs from other fonts.
12851 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12873 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12879 \begin_inset Index idx
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12884 -packages ! aeguill
12889 with the document preamble line
12890 \begin_inset Newline newline
12897 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12898 \begin_inset Newline newline
12903 will fix the guillemet problem.
12908 and that accented characters are not
12912 glyph, but built of
12916 characters, the accent and the letter.
12917 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12923 If you search for example for the French word
12924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12931 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12940 and not for the glyph
12941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12945 \begin_inset space ~
12949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12955 \begin_layout Itemize
12956 If you do not like the look of
12964 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12969 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12985 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12986 \begin_inset space ~
12989 serif and typewriter fonts,
12993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12994 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13010 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13015 \begin_inset space \space{}
13023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13027 \begin_inset space \space{}
13033 \begin_inset space ~
13041 \begin_inset space ~
13051 but you can also select your own.
13052 \begin_inset Newline newline
13055 The differences between roman,
13058 \begin_inset space ~
13067 fonts are explained in section
13068 \begin_inset space ~
13072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13074 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13079 \begin_inset Newline newline
13085 \begin_inset space ~
13090 was originally designed for newspapers.
13091 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13092 into the small newspaper columns.
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13101 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13104 \begin_layout Standard
13105 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13118 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13123 depends on the class you are using.
13124 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13127 \begin_layout Standard
13128 Note that the font size is the
13133 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13134 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13135 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13136 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13139 \begin_inset space ~
13145 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13146 \begin_inset space ~
13150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13152 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13168 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13173 serif or typewriter.
13178 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13188 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13191 \begin_layout Standard
13196 LaTeX font encoding
13198 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13199 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13205 \begin_inset Index idx
13208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13210 -packages ! fontenc
13216 \begin_inset space ~
13220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13222 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13227 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13228 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13235 \begin_layout Standard
13236 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13238 Use Old Style Figures
13242 Use True Small Caps
13245 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13248 Use Old Style Figures
13250 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13252 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13260 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13264 Use True Small Caps
13266 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13267 of scaled capitals.
13268 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13269 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13272 \begin_layout Standard
13277 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13278 a font to display the script characters.
13282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13283 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13289 \begin_inset Index idx
13292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13299 So this has no effect for the document language
13313 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13325 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13330 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13331 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13333 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13335 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13338 dialog, see section
13339 \begin_inset space ~
13343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13345 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13357 \begin_layout Subsection
13361 \begin_layout Standard
13362 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13363 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13365 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13366 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13367 choose a math font in the dialog
13369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13373 \begin_inset Index idx
13376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13377 Document ! Settings
13383 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13384 automatically selects a math font.
13385 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13386 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13406 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13407 document font is available.
13410 \begin_layout Standard
13411 Note that the math font will not be used for
13415 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13421 or by the insertion of the command
13428 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13429 \begin_inset space ~
13433 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13434 while the math characters do not.
13436 \begin_inset space ~
13439 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13442 \begin_inset space ~
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13455 in the document font settings.
13458 \begin_layout Standard
13459 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13460 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13461 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13462 font (in most cases
13463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13469 \begin_inset space ~
13475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13478 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13479 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13487 \begin_inset space ~
13493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13499 \begin_layout Subsection
13500 Using Different Character Styles
13501 \begin_inset Index idx
13504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13511 \begin_inset Index idx
13514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13523 \begin_layout Standard
13524 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13525 automatically changes the character style for certain
13526 paragraph environments.
13528 supports two character styles,
13537 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13541 \begin_layout Standard
13546 style, do one of the following:
13549 \begin_layout Itemize
13550 click on the toolbar button
13559 \begin_layout Itemize
13560 use the key binding
13569 \begin_layout Standard
13570 These commands are all toggles.
13575 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13579 One typically uses the
13583 style for proper names.
13585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13592 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13600 \begin_layout Standard
13601 A more widely used character style is the
13606 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13613 \begin_layout Itemize
13614 clicking on the toolbar button
13623 \begin_layout Itemize
13624 using the keybindings
13633 \begin_layout Standard
13638 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13640 use a different font.
13643 \begin_layout Standard
13644 We've been using the
13648 style all over the place in this document.
13649 Here's one more example:
13652 \begin_layout Quotation
13655 Do not overuse character styles!
13658 \begin_layout Standard
13659 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13660 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13661 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13662 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13666 \begin_layout Standard
13667 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13675 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13677 \begin_inset space ~
13680 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13686 arg "dialog-show character"
13692 \begin_layout Subsection
13693 Fine-Tuning with the
13698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13700 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13705 \begin_inset Index idx
13708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13717 \begin_layout Standard
13718 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13720 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13721 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13722 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13723 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13724 from ordinary dialog.
13727 \begin_layout Standard
13728 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13729 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13730 \begin_inset Newline newline
13733 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13734 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13737 \begin_layout Standard
13738 To use custom character styles, open the
13740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13742 \begin_inset space ~
13745 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13748 dialog or press the toolbar button
13751 arg "dialog-show character"
13755 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13756 font property that you can choose.
13757 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13760 \begin_inset space ~
13765 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13770 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13771 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13772 environments all at once.
13775 \begin_layout Standard
13776 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13779 \begin_inset space ~
13791 \begin_layout Labeling
13792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13806 The possible options are:
13810 \begin_layout Labeling
13811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13816 This is the Roman font family.
13817 Normally a serif font.
13818 It's also the default family.
13828 \begin_layout Labeling
13829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13833 \begin_inset space ~
13840 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13852 \begin_layout Labeling
13853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13860 This is the Typewriter font family.
13866 arg "font-typewriter"
13875 \begin_layout Labeling
13876 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13881 This corresponds to the print weight.
13886 \begin_layout Labeling
13887 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13892 This is the Medium font series.
13893 It's also the default series.
13896 \begin_layout Labeling
13897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13904 This is the Bold font series.
13917 \begin_layout Labeling
13918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13923 As the name implies.
13928 \begin_layout Labeling
13929 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13934 This is the Upright font shape.
13935 It's also the default shape.
13938 \begin_layout Labeling
13939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 s the Italic font shape
13959 \begin_layout Labeling
13960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13967 This is the Slanted font shape
13969 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13970 , this is different from italic).
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13978 \begin_inset space ~
13985 This is the Small caps font shape
13992 \begin_layout Labeling
13993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 Alters the text color.
13999 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14003 \begin_inset space ~
14008 , which means that the document default color set in
14010 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14011 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14017 \begin_inset space ~
14022 is used, you can choose between
14055 \begin_inset Index idx
14058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14067 \begin_layout Labeling
14068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14073 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14074 the language of the document.
14075 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14076 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14078 \begin_inset Newline newline
14081 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14083 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14084 When using the spell checking (see section
14085 \begin_inset space ~
14089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14091 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14095 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14098 \begin_layout Labeling
14099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14104 Alters the size of the font.
14105 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14106 proportional to the document font size.
14107 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14108 the details, but a general description of what
14114 \begin_layout Labeling
14115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14136 arg "font-size tiny"
14142 \begin_layout Labeling
14143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14164 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14170 \begin_layout Labeling
14171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14192 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14198 \begin_layout Labeling
14199 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14220 arg "font-size small"
14226 \begin_layout Labeling
14227 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14241 It's also the default size.
14245 arg "font-size normal"
14251 \begin_layout Labeling
14252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14273 arg "font-size large"
14279 \begin_layout Labeling
14280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14301 arg "font-size larger"
14307 \begin_layout Labeling
14308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14329 arg "font-size largest"
14335 \begin_layout Labeling
14336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14357 arg "font-size huge"
14363 \begin_layout Labeling
14364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14385 arg "font-size giant"
14391 \begin_layout Labeling
14392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14397 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14417 arg "font-size increase"
14423 \begin_layout Labeling
14424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14429 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14449 arg "font-size decrease"
14456 \begin_layout Standard
14461 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14462 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14464 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14465 — use those instead.
14466 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14469 \begin_layout Labeling
14470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14475 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14480 \begin_layout Labeling
14481 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14488 This is text with emphasize on
14491 This might seem like the same as
14495 , but it is actually a bit different.
14501 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14503 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14514 This is text with Underbar on.
14520 arg "font-underline"
14526 \begin_inset Newline newline
14531 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14532 when you could not change fonts.
14533 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14534 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14535 because some people
14539 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14542 \begin_layout Labeling
14543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14547 \begin_inset space ~
14554 This is text with Double underbar on.
14560 arg "font-underunderline"
14564 \begin_inset Newline newline
14567 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14568 about double underbar.
14571 \begin_layout Labeling
14572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14576 \begin_inset space ~
14583 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14589 arg "font-underwave"
14593 \begin_inset Newline newline
14596 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14597 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14600 \begin_layout Labeling
14601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14608 This is text with Strikeout on.
14614 arg "font-strikeout"
14618 \begin_inset Newline newline
14621 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14622 changed in the meantime.
14625 \begin_layout Labeling
14626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14633 This is text with Noun on.
14640 , this is a logical attribute.
14641 Normally it's equivalent to
14644 \begin_inset space ~
14653 \begin_layout Standard
14654 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14655 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14657 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14659 \begin_inset space ~
14662 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14668 arg "dialog-show character"
14671 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14672 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14675 arg "textstyle-apply"
14679 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14683 \begin_layout Standard
14684 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14691 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14692 (suppose you just set the shape to
14693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14711 \begin_inset space ~
14723 \begin_layout Standard
14724 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14732 \begin_inset space ~
14744 \begin_layout Itemize
14750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14757 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14775 \begin_inset Newline newline
14779 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14793 \begin_inset Note Note
14796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14797 For more on phantoms see section
14798 \begin_inset space ~
14802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14804 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14814 \begin_inset Newline newline
14820 \begin_layout Itemize
14825 fonts use characters with serifs.
14826 These are the small
14827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14834 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14835 The following example shows the difference:
14836 \begin_inset Newline newline
14840 \begin_inset Newline newline
14845 text without serifs
14848 \begin_inset Newline newline
14851 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14852 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14859 \begin_layout Itemize
14864 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14865 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14866 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14869 \begin_layout Standard
14870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14877 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14878 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14881 \begin_inset space ~
14886 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14887 the property to be removed.
14888 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14889 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14890 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14908 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14909 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14917 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14921 \begin_inset space ~
14926 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14937 If you, for example, set
14938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 \begin_inset space ~
14961 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14973 \begin_layout Standard
14974 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14975 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14978 \begin_layout Section
14979 Printing and Previewing
14982 \begin_layout Subsection
14986 \begin_layout Standard
14987 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14988 using \SpecialChar LyX
14989 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14990 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14991 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14992 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14994 Additional Features
14999 \begin_layout Standard
15001 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15004 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15005 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15006 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15009 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15010 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15011 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15012 to turn your writing into printable output.
15013 This happens in two stages:
15016 \begin_layout Enumerate
15017 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15018 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15020 a file with the extension,
15021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15035 \begin_layout Enumerate
15036 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15037 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15038 to use the commands in the
15042 file to produce printable output.
15045 \begin_layout Subsection
15046 Output file formats
15047 \begin_inset Index idx
15050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15059 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15067 Simple text (ASCII)
15068 \begin_inset Index idx
15071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15072 File formats ! ASCII
15080 \begin_layout Standard
15081 This file type has the extension
15082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15094 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15098 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 \begin_layout Standard
15106 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15108 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15109 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15111 \begin_inset space ~
15117 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15118 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15119 bibliography (section
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15126 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15131 If your document includes such material, use
15133 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15134 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15136 \begin_inset space ~
15140 \begin_inset space ~
15144 \begin_inset space ~
15152 \begin_inset space ~
15156 \begin_inset space ~
15162 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15163 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15169 \begin_inset Index idx
15172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15173 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15182 \begin_layout Standard
15183 This file type has the extension
15184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15195 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15198 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15199 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15200 -Errors or to process it manually
15201 with console commands.
15202 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15203 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15204 's temporary directory whenever you
15205 view or export your document.
15208 \begin_layout Standard
15209 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15210 -file using the menu
15212 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15213 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15217 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 export variants are explained in section
15219 \begin_inset space ~
15223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15225 reference "subsec:Export"
15232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15234 \begin_inset Index idx
15237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15246 \begin_layout Standard
15247 This file type has the extension
15248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15268 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15269 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15270 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15274 \begin_layout Standard
15275 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15276 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15277 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15278 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15279 when you view the DVI.
15280 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15283 \begin_layout Standard
15284 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15286 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15287 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15292 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15293 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15295 \begin_inset space ~
15301 The latter option uses the program
15303 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15309 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15312 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15313 font access (see section
15314 \begin_inset space ~
15318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15320 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15325 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15326 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15333 \begin_inset Index idx
15336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15337 File formats ! PostScript
15345 \begin_layout Standard
15346 This file type has the extension
15347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15359 PostScript was developed by the company
15363 as a printer language.
15364 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15366 PostScript can be seen as a
15367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15370 programming language
15371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15374 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15379 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15386 \begin_inset Index idx
15389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15391 -packages ! pstricks
15401 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15404 \begin_layout Standard
15405 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15409 Encapsulated PostScript
15410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15413 (EPS, file extension
15414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15426 As \SpecialChar LyX
15427 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15428 convert them in the background to EPS.
15429 If, for example, you have 50
15430 \begin_inset space ~
15433 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15435 \begin_inset space ~
15438 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15439 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15441 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15442 EPS to avoid this problem.
15445 \begin_layout Standard
15446 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15448 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15449 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15457 \begin_inset Index idx
15460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15467 \begin_inset Index idx
15470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15479 \begin_layout Standard
15480 This file type has the extension
15481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15497 Portable Document Format
15498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15505 was derived from PostScript.
15506 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15515 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15516 looks exactly the same.
15519 \begin_layout Standard
15520 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15524 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15528 (JPG, file extension
15529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15556 Portable Network Graphics
15557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15560 (PNG, file extension
15561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15574 converts them in the
15575 background to one of these formats.
15576 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15577 will slow down your workflow.
15578 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15581 \begin_layout Standard
15582 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15584 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15590 \begin_layout Description
15592 \begin_inset space ~
15595 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15599 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15602 \begin_layout Description
15604 \begin_inset space ~
15611 ) This uses the program
15613 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15616 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15619 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15622 is a new engine, derived from
15626 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15627 access (see section
15628 \begin_inset space ~
15632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15634 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15639 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15640 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15645 \begin_layout Description
15647 \begin_inset space ~
15654 ) This uses the program
15659 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15665 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15666 font access (see section
15667 \begin_inset space ~
15671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15673 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15678 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15679 vertically written Japanese.
15682 \begin_layout Description
15684 \begin_inset space ~
15687 (cropped) This is the same as
15690 \begin_inset space ~
15695 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15696 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15697 to generate good-looking
15698 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15701 \begin_layout Description
15703 \begin_inset space ~
15706 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15710 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15714 \begin_layout Description
15716 \begin_inset space ~
15719 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15723 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15724 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15728 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15729 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15732 \begin_layout Standard
15736 \begin_inset space ~
15745 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15746 works without problems.
15747 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15748 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15752 \begin_inset space ~
15760 \begin_inset space ~
15765 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15775 \begin_inset Index idx
15778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15779 FileFormats ! XHTML
15785 \begin_inset Index idx
15788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15797 \begin_layout Standard
15798 This file type has the extension
15799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15811 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15812 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15813 When \SpecialChar LyX
15814 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15815 suitable for the purpose.
15816 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15819 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15822 between different formats, which are described in section
15824 Math Output in XHTML
15829 \begin_inset space ~
15837 \begin_layout Standard
15838 XHTML output remains
15839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15846 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15847 features are supported yet.
15851 and the World Wide Web
15855 Additional Features
15857 manual, for more information.
15860 \begin_layout Standard
15861 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15863 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15864 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15870 \begin_layout Subsection
15872 \begin_inset Index idx
15875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15884 \begin_layout Standard
15885 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15886 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15895 or use the toolbar button
15902 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15903 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15910 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15914 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15922 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15927 Further output formats can be selected via
15929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15930 View (Other Formats)
15932 or the toolbar button
15933 \begin_inset Graphics
15934 filename ../images/view-others.png
15936 groupId toolbarbuttons
15943 \begin_layout Standard
15944 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15945 viewer window using the menu
15947 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15953 Update (Other Formats)
15958 \begin_layout Standard
15959 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15962 To have a real output, export your document.
15965 \begin_layout Section
15966 A few Words about Typography
15967 \begin_inset Index idx
15970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15979 \begin_layout Subsection
15980 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15981 \begin_inset Index idx
15984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15991 \begin_inset Index idx
15994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16003 \begin_layout Standard
16004 In \SpecialChar LyX
16006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16017 character comes in four lengths: the
16029 , and the minus sign:
16030 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16037 \begin_inset Tabular
16038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16039 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16040 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16041 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16042 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16043 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16072 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16112 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16139 \begin_inset space ~
16142 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16149 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16176 \begin_inset space ~
16179 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16234 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16240 \begin_layout Standard
16241 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16253 character multiple times in a row.
16254 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16255 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16288 \begin_layout Standard
16289 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16290 math mode and has a length of its own.
16291 Here are some examples:
16294 \begin_layout Enumerate
16295 line- and page-breaks
16296 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16306 \begin_layout Enumerate
16308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16318 \begin_layout Enumerate
16319 Oh — there's a dash.
16320 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16330 \begin_layout Enumerate
16331 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16335 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16345 \begin_layout Subsection
16347 \begin_inset Index idx
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16359 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16366 \begin_layout Standard
16367 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16368 but automatically in the output.
16369 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16375 \begin_inset Index idx
16378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16385 following the rules of the document language.
16388 \begin_layout Standard
16390 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16394 font and with unusual constructs, like
16395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16403 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16404 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16405 This is done with the menu
16407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16408 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16410 \begin_inset space ~
16416 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16418 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16422 \begin_layout Standard
16423 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16424 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16435 would then see the hyphen
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16443 as a hyphenation possibility.
16444 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16445 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16446 as described in section
16447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16450 Prevent Hyphenation
16451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16457 \begin_inset space ~
16465 \begin_layout Subsection
16467 \begin_inset Index idx
16470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16480 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16483 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16490 \begin_layout Standard
16491 When \SpecialChar LyX
16492 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16493 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16495 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16501 appropriate amount of space.
16502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16505 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16507 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16508 gets after another word.
16511 \begin_layout Standard
16512 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16513 not work in all cases.
16515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16526 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16527 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16530 \begin_layout Standard
16531 Here are some examples of
16535 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16538 \begin_layout Itemize
16543 \begin_layout Itemize
16548 \begin_layout Standard
16549 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16552 \begin_layout Itemize
16554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16558 this is too much space!
16561 \begin_layout Itemize
16566 \begin_layout Standard
16567 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16570 \begin_layout Standard
16571 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16574 \begin_layout Enumerate
16578 \begin_inset space ~
16583 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16584 \begin_inset space ~
16588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16590 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16595 \begin_inset Index idx
16598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16599 Spaces ! inter-word
16607 \begin_layout Enumerate
16611 \begin_inset space ~
16616 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16623 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16628 \begin_inset Index idx
16631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16640 \begin_layout Enumerate
16644 \begin_inset space ~
16648 \begin_inset space ~
16652 \begin_inset space ~
16659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16661 \begin_inset space ~
16666 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16667 This function is also bound to
16670 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16676 \begin_layout Standard
16677 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16680 \begin_layout Itemize
16682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16686 \begin_inset space \space{}
16689 this is too much space!
16692 \begin_layout Itemize
16693 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16697 \begin_layout Standard
16698 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16699 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16701 will take care of this.
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16705 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16709 \begin_inset space ~
16715 feature described in the section
16717 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16722 Additional Features
16727 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16729 \begin_inset Index idx
16732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16733 Typography ! Quotes
16739 \begin_inset Index idx
16742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16775 usually sets quotes correctly.
16776 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16777 and use a closing quote at the end.
16779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16787 The keyboard character,
16791 , generates this automatically.
16794 \begin_layout Standard
16795 You can specify what character the
16799 key produces using the submenu
16805 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16809 \begin_inset Index idx
16812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16813 Document ! Settings
16823 There are six choices:
16826 \begin_layout Labeling
16827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16850 \begin_layout Labeling
16851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16854 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16858 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16864 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16868 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16874 \begin_layout Labeling
16875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16878 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16882 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16888 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16892 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16898 \begin_layout Labeling
16899 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16902 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16906 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16912 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16916 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16922 \begin_layout Labeling
16923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16926 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16930 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16936 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16940 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16946 \begin_layout Labeling
16947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16950 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16954 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16960 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16964 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16970 \begin_layout Standard
16971 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16974 arg "quote-insert single"
16980 \begin_layout Subsection
16982 \begin_inset Index idx
16985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16986 Typography ! Ligatures
16992 \begin_inset Index idx
16995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17026 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17033 \begin_layout Standard
17034 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17035 print them as single characters.
17036 These groups are known as
17041 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17042 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17044 Here are the standard ligatures:
17047 \begin_layout Itemize
17051 \begin_layout Itemize
17055 \begin_layout Itemize
17059 \begin_layout Itemize
17063 \begin_layout Itemize
17067 \begin_layout Standard
17068 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17071 \begin_layout Standard
17072 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17073 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17081 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17097 To break a ligature, use
17099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17100 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17102 \begin_inset space ~
17109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17120 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17137 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17145 \begin_layout Subsection
17147 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17149 \begin_inset Index idx
17152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17162 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17169 \begin_layout Standard
17172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17176 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17179 \begin_layout Description
17181 The name of the game.
17184 \begin_layout Description
17186 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17190 \begin_layout Description
17192 The \SpecialChar TeX
17193 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17197 \begin_layout Description
17198 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17199 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17203 \begin_layout Standard
17204 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17210 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17218 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17219 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17220 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17221 converges to the number
17222 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17225 : The actual version is
17226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17234 , the previous one was
17235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17246 \begin_layout Subsection
17248 \begin_inset Index idx
17251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17262 space between two words.
17263 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17273 for units use the menu
17275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17276 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17286 arg "space-insert thin"
17292 \begin_layout Standard
17293 Here is an example to show the differences:
17296 \begin_layout Standard
17297 \begin_inset Tabular
17298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17299 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17300 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17301 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17308 \begin_inset space ~
17312 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17324 space between number and unit
17331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17340 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17352 half space between number and unit
17365 \begin_layout Subsection
17367 \begin_inset Index idx
17370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17371 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17379 \begin_layout Standard
17380 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17382 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17383 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17384 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17385 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17386 These bits of text became known as
17397 \begin_layout Standard
17398 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17399 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17400 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17401 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17402 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17403 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17404 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17405 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17406 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17407 \begin_inset Newline newline
17415 \begin_inset Newline newline
17423 \begin_inset Newline newline
17426 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17427 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17428 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17430 \begin_inset space ~
17434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17436 key "latexcompanion"
17441 \begin_inset space ~
17445 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17451 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17452 's page break mechanism.
17455 \begin_layout Chapter
17456 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17459 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17466 \begin_layout Standard
17467 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17470 \begin_inset space ~
17476 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17479 \begin_layout Section
17481 \begin_inset Index idx
17484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17500 \begin_layout Standard
17502 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17505 \begin_layout Description
17508 \begin_inset space ~
17511 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17512 \begin_inset Newline newline
17516 \begin_inset Note Note
17519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17520 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17528 \begin_layout Description
17529 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17530 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17531 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17534 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17535 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17537 \begin_inset space ~
17543 \begin_inset Newline newline
17547 \begin_inset Note Comment
17550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17551 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17560 \begin_layout Description
17562 \begin_inset space ~
17565 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17566 set in the document settings under
17568 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17570 \begin_inset space ~
17576 \begin_inset Newline newline
17580 \begin_inset Newline newline
17584 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17593 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17594 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17599 of a comment that appears in the output.
17605 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17612 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17615 \begin_layout Standard
17616 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17628 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17631 \begin_layout Section
17633 \begin_inset Index idx
17636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17645 name "sec:Footnotes"
17652 \begin_layout Standard
17654 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17660 or the toolbar button
17663 arg "footnote-insert"
17675 \begin_inset Graphics
17676 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17685 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17686 's representation of your footnote.
17696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17715 label, the box will
17719 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17720 Clicking on the box label again will close
17733 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17734 and click on the footnote
17749 \begin_layout Standard
17750 Here is an example footnote:
17758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17759 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17767 \begin_layout Standard
17768 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17769 position where the footnote box is placed.
17770 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17771 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17772 according to the document class.
17774 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17775 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17781 ey are described in the
17784 \begin_inset space ~
17792 \begin_layout Section
17794 \begin_inset Index idx
17797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17806 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17813 \begin_layout Standard
17814 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17816 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17820 \begin_inset space ~
17825 or the toolbar button
17828 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17854 appearing within your text.
17855 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17856 's representation of your margin
17865 \begin_layout Standard
17866 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17870 \begin_inset Marginal
17873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17875 This is a marginal note.
17883 \begin_layout Standard
17884 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17885 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17886 pages, right on odd pages.
17889 \begin_layout Standard
17890 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17893 \begin_inset space ~
17901 \begin_inset space ~
17909 \begin_layout Section
17910 Graphics and Images
17911 \begin_inset Index idx
17914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17921 \begin_inset Index idx
17924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17933 name "sec:Graphics"
17940 \begin_layout Standard
17941 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17942 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17945 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17954 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17957 \begin_layout Standard
17958 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17963 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17964 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17966 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17967 \begin_inset space ~
17971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17973 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17980 \begin_layout Standard
17985 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17986 of the image in the output.
17987 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17991 \begin_inset space ~
17995 \begin_inset space ~
18004 \begin_inset space ~
18008 \begin_inset space ~
18012 \begin_inset space ~
18017 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18018 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18026 \begin_layout Standard
18030 \begin_inset space ~
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18039 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18040 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18042 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18052 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18053 with the image size is printed.
18056 \begin_layout Standard
18057 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18058 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18060 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18063 \begin_layout Standard
18065 \begin_inset Graphics
18066 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18074 \begin_layout Standard
18075 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18076 the image into a float, see section
18077 \begin_inset space ~
18081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18083 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18090 \begin_layout Subsection
18092 \begin_inset Index idx
18095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18104 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18111 \begin_layout Standard
18112 You can insert images in any known file format.
18113 But as we explained in section
18114 \begin_inset space ~
18118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18120 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18124 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18126 therefore uses the program
18130 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18131 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18132 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18133 \begin_inset space ~
18137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18139 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18146 \begin_layout Standard
18147 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18150 \begin_layout Description
18152 \begin_inset space ~
18155 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18156 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18157 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18161 Graphics Interchange Format
18162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18165 (GIF, file extension
18166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18178 \begin_inset Index idx
18181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18213 Portable Network Graphics
18214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18217 (PNG, file extension
18218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18230 \begin_inset Index idx
18233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18265 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18269 (JPG, file extension
18270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18294 \begin_inset Index idx
18297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18328 \begin_layout Description
18330 \begin_inset space ~
18333 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18335 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18336 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18337 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18338 \begin_inset Newline newline
18341 Scalable image formats can be
18342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18345 Scalable Vector Graphics
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18349 (SVG, file extension
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18362 \begin_inset Index idx
18365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18397 Encapsulated PostScript
18398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18401 (EPS, file extension
18402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18414 \begin_inset Index idx
18417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18449 Portable Document Format
18450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18453 (PDF, file extension
18454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18466 \begin_inset Index idx
18469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18484 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18485 result will not be scalable.
18486 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18492 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18500 \begin_layout Standard
18501 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18508 \begin_layout Subsection
18509 Grouping of Image Settings
18510 \begin_inset Index idx
18513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18514 Images ! Settings grouping
18522 \begin_layout Standard
18523 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18525 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18526 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18528 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18529 need to manually change each of them.
18533 \begin_layout Standard
18534 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18537 \begin_inset space ~
18541 \begin_inset space ~
18553 \begin_inset space ~
18557 \begin_inset space ~
18563 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18564 and checking the name of the desired group.
18567 \begin_layout Section
18569 \begin_inset Index idx
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18588 \begin_layout Standard
18589 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18592 arg "tabular-insert"
18597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18601 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18602 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18603 from the rest of the table.
18604 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18605 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18607 Here is an example table:
18610 \begin_layout Standard
18612 \begin_inset Tabular
18613 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18614 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18616 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18617 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18618 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 \begin_layout Subsection
18822 \begin_layout Standard
18823 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18826 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18830 This brings up the table dialog.
18831 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18832 cursor is placed currently.
18833 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18834 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18835 done on all of your selection.
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18839 In addition to the table dialog, the
18842 \begin_inset space ~
18847 helps you in setting table properties.
18848 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18851 \begin_layout Standard
18855 \begin_inset space ~
18860 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18861 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18862 current cell respectively.
18863 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18865 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18866 of text, see section
18867 \begin_inset space ~
18871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18873 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18880 \begin_layout Standard
18881 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18882 using the check box
18891 This will merge the cells to
18895 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18896 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18897 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18898 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18899 in the last row without the upper border:
18902 \begin_layout Standard
18904 \begin_inset Tabular
18905 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18906 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18907 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18908 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18909 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18921 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18930 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19006 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19041 \begin_layout Standard
19042 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19043 -arguments for the table.
19044 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19045 explained in the chapter
19052 \begin_inset space ~
19058 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19059 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19060 but are visible in the output.
19063 \begin_layout Standard
19064 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19072 Most DVI-viewers are
19076 able to display rotations.
19084 \begin_layout Standard
19089 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19094 adds lines for all cell borders.
19097 \begin_layout Subsection
19099 \begin_inset Index idx
19102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19103 Tables ! Longtables
19109 \begin_inset Index idx
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19121 \begin_layout Standard
19122 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19125 \begin_inset space ~
19129 \begin_inset space ~
19138 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19139 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19142 \begin_layout Description
19147 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19148 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19149 except for the first page, if
19152 \begin_inset space ~
19160 \begin_layout Description
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19169 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19170 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19173 \begin_layout Description
19178 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19179 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19180 except for the last page, if
19183 \begin_inset space ~
19191 \begin_layout Description
19195 \begin_inset space ~
19200 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19201 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19204 \begin_layout Description
19205 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19206 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19212 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19215 \begin_inset space ~
19223 \begin_layout Standard
19224 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19225 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19226 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19232 In this context, first means first in this order:
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19247 \begin_inset space ~
19252 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19255 \begin_layout Standard
19257 \begin_inset Tabular
19258 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19259 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19260 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19261 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19262 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19263 <row endfirsthead="true">
19264 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19270 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19275 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19284 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19294 <row endfirsthead="true">
19295 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19306 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19327 <row endhead="true">
19328 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19339 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19348 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19358 <row endhead="true">
19359 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19370 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19391 <row endfoot="true">
19392 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19403 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19443 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20537 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20568 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20599 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21373 <row endlastfoot="true">
21374 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21385 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 \begin_layout Subsection
21413 \begin_inset Index idx
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21425 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21432 \begin_layout Standard
21433 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21434 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21435 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21436 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21440 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21443 \begin_layout Standard
21444 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21445 for the column in the table dialog.
21446 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21447 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21451 \begin_layout Standard
21453 \begin_inset Tabular
21454 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21455 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21456 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21457 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21458 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21547 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 This is longer now.
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21660 This is longer now.
21665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 \begin_layout Standard
21692 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21693 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21699 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21705 Selection with the mouse or with
21709 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21710 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21711 the selection from outside the table.
21714 \begin_layout Section
21716 \begin_inset Index idx
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21735 \begin_layout Subsection
21739 \begin_layout Standard
21740 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21741 have a fixed location.
21743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21750 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21758 \begin_inset space ~
21763 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21764 too many notes on the current page.
21767 \begin_layout Standard
21768 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21769 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21770 and pages without text.
21771 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21772 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21773 Floats are therefore numbered.
21774 Referencing is described in section
21775 \begin_inset space ~
21779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21781 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21788 \begin_layout Standard
21789 To insert a float, use the menu
21791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21795 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21796 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21798 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21799 \begin_inset Index idx
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21808 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21809 paragraph within the float.
21810 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21811 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21812 left-clicking on the box label.
21813 A closed float box looks like this:
21814 \begin_inset Graphics
21815 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21820 – a gray button with a red label.
21823 \begin_layout Standard
21824 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21826 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21829 \begin_layout Subsection
21831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21833 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21838 \begin_inset Index idx
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 Floats ! Figure floats
21850 \begin_layout Standard
21852 \begin_inset space ~
21856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21858 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21862 was created using the menu
21864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21865 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21871 arg "float-insert figure"
21875 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21884 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21888 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21889 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21891 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21893 \begin_inset space ~
21901 arg "layout-paragraph"
21907 \begin_layout Standard
21908 \begin_inset Float figure
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 \begin_inset Graphics
21916 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21926 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21931 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21935 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21948 \begin_layout Standard
21949 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21950 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21961 ) and refer to it using the menu
21963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21969 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21973 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21974 vague references like
21975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21982 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21983 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21993 For more about cross-references, see section
21994 \begin_inset space ~
21998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22000 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22007 \begin_layout Standard
22008 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22009 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22010 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22011 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22012 as described in section
22013 \begin_inset space ~
22017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22019 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22025 \begin_inset space ~
22029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22031 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22035 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22036 You can also set the images one below the other.
22038 \begin_inset space ~
22042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22044 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22051 reference "fig:Platypus"
22055 are the subfigures.
22058 \begin_layout Standard
22059 \begin_inset Float figure
22064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22069 \begin_inset Float figure
22074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22075 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22080 name "fig:Undefinable"
22092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22093 \begin_inset Graphics
22094 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22105 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22109 \begin_inset Float figure
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22115 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22120 name "fig:Platypus"
22132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22133 \begin_inset Graphics
22134 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22146 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22153 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22158 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22162 Two distorted images.
22175 \begin_layout Subsection
22177 \begin_inset Index idx
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 Floats ! Table floats
22189 \begin_layout Standard
22190 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22193 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22196 or the toolbar button
22199 arg "float-insert table"
22203 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22204 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22205 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22207 \begin_inset space ~
22211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22213 reference "tab:Table-float"
22220 \begin_layout Standard
22221 \begin_inset Float table
22226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22232 name "tab:Table-float"
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22246 \begin_inset Tabular
22247 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22248 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22402 \end{array}\right]$
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22423 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22444 \begin_layout Subsection
22446 \begin_inset Index idx
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 \begin_layout Standard
22460 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22461 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22462 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22464 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22472 \begin_inset space ~
22480 \begin_layout Section
22482 \begin_inset Index idx
22485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22494 \begin_layout Standard
22496 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22498 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22499 \begin_inset space \space{}
22506 \begin_layout Standard
22507 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22508 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22514 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22515 and its alignment within the page.
22518 \begin_layout Standard
22520 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22530 height_special "totalheight"
22535 backgroundcolor "none"
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 This is a minipage.
22542 The text is set in an italic style.
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22548 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22549 another formatting.
22557 \begin_layout Standard
22558 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22561 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22565 as described in section
22566 \begin_inset space ~
22570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22572 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22577 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22583 \begin_layout Standard
22584 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22594 height_special "totalheight"
22599 backgroundcolor "none"
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22604 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22610 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22614 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22624 height_special "totalheight"
22629 backgroundcolor "none"
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22634 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22642 \begin_layout Standard
22643 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22649 \begin_layout Standard
22650 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22652 All box types and their settings
22653 \change_inserted 2047637253 1447344632
22654 , as well as variable-width minipages,
22656 are explained in detail in chapter
22663 \begin_inset space ~
22671 \begin_layout Chapter
22672 Mathematical Formulas
22673 \begin_inset Index idx
22676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22683 \begin_inset Index idx
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22717 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22724 \begin_layout Standard
22725 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22730 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22733 \begin_layout Section
22735 \begin_inset Index idx
22738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 \begin_layout Standard
22748 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22761 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22763 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22764 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22765 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22773 \begin_layout Standard
22774 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22778 \begin_inset space ~
22783 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22786 \begin_layout Standard
22787 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22788 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22791 \begin_layout Standard
22792 This is a line with an inline formula
22793 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22799 \begin_layout Standard
22800 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22801 paragraph, like this one:
22802 \begin_inset Formula
22809 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22812 \begin_layout Standard
22814 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22816 For example, typing
22817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22830 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22831 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22835 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22838 \begin_inset space ~
22846 \begin_layout Subsection
22847 Navigating in Formulas
22848 \begin_inset Index idx
22851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 \begin_layout Standard
22861 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22862 achieved with the arrow keys.
22864 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22865 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22870 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22871 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22875 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22879 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22882 \end{array}\right]$
22890 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22895 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22896 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22899 \begin_layout Standard
22904 , printed in this document as
22905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22909 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22916 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22917 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22918 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22923 For example, if you want
22924 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22932 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22942 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22946 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22951 , since in the latter case only the
22954 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22959 will be under the square root sign:
22960 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22966 \begin_layout Standard
22967 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22969 \begin_inset Formula
22971 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22980 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22981 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22984 \begin_layout Subsection
22988 \begin_layout Standard
22989 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22990 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22994 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22995 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22996 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22997 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22998 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23002 \begin_layout Subsection
23003 Exponents and Subscripts
23004 \begin_inset Index idx
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23014 \begin_inset Index idx
23017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 \begin_layout Standard
23027 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23030 arg "math-superscript"
23036 arg "math-subscript"
23039 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23041 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23044 , type in a formula
23047 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23057 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23063 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23067 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23073 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23079 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23088 , you have to use an extra
23092 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23093 For example, if you want
23094 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23100 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23106 Subscripts are similar: To get
23107 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23113 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23121 \begin_layout Subsection
23123 \begin_inset Index idx
23126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 \begin_layout Standard
23136 Create a fraction either with the command
23142 or by using the icon
23145 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23151 \begin_inset space ~
23157 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23158 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23159 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23164 To move back up, press
23169 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23170 \begin_inset Formula
23172 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23175 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23183 \begin_layout Subsection
23185 \begin_inset Index idx
23188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 \begin_layout Standard
23198 Roots can be created using the
23201 \begin_inset space ~
23209 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23215 arg "math-insert \\root"
23237 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23243 always produces a square root.
23246 \begin_layout Subsection
23247 Operators with Limits
23248 \begin_inset Index idx
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 \begin_inset Index idx
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23270 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23277 \begin_layout Standard
23279 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23283 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23286 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23287 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23288 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23289 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23290 The sum operator will automatically place its
23291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23298 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23300 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23304 \begin_inset Formula
23306 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23311 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23315 \begin_layout Standard
23316 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23318 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23319 behind the operator and using the menu
23321 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23322 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23324 \begin_inset space ~
23328 \begin_inset space ~
23342 \begin_layout Standard
23343 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23352 \begin_inset Index idx
23355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23362 \begin_inset Formula
23364 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23369 which will place the
23370 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23382 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23383 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23389 \begin_layout Standard
23390 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23397 Have a look at section
23398 \begin_inset space ~
23402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23404 reference "subsec:Functions"
23408 for an explanation of function macros.
23411 \begin_layout Subsection
23413 \begin_inset Index idx
23416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23425 \begin_layout Standard
23426 Most math symbols can be found in the
23429 \begin_inset space ~
23434 under one of several categories; including
23451 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23455 \begin_layout Standard
23456 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23457 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23458 don't have to use the
23461 \begin_inset space ~
23466 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23468 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23471 \begin_layout Subsection
23473 \begin_inset Index idx
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 \begin_layout Standard
23486 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23492 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23498 \begin_inset space ~
23506 arg "math-insert \\space"
23510 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23511 For example, the sequence
23516 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23519 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23521 \begin_inset Graphics
23522 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23527 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23528 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23529 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23530 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23531 , because they are negative
23533 Here are two examples:
23536 \begin_layout Standard
23546 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23552 \begin_layout Standard
23562 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23568 \begin_layout Subsection
23570 \begin_inset Index idx
23573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23582 name "subsec:Functions"
23589 \begin_layout Standard
23593 \begin_inset space ~
23598 contains under the button
23601 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23604 a number of function macros, such as
23605 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23609 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23617 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23624 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23625 avoid confusions, because
23626 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23630 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23636 \begin_layout Standard
23637 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23639 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23643 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23649 \begin_layout Standard
23650 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23651 are placed, as described in section
23652 \begin_inset space ~
23656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23658 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23665 \begin_layout Subsection
23667 \begin_inset Index idx
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 \begin_layout Standard
23680 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23682 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23683 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23684 commands, for example, to enter
23685 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23688 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23689 Our example is entered by typing
23694 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23701 \begin_inset space ~
23705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23707 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23711 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23714 \begin_layout Standard
23715 \begin_inset Float table
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23726 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23730 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 \begin_inset Tabular
23741 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23742 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23744 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23745 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24099 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24153 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24207 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24261 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24327 \begin_layout Standard
24328 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24331 \begin_inset space ~
24339 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24342 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24346 \begin_layout Section
24347 Brackets and Delimiters
24348 \begin_inset Index idx
24351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 \begin_inset Index idx
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24370 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24377 \begin_layout Standard
24378 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24380 For some purposes, using just the keys
24385 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24386 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24387 toolbar delimiter icon
24390 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24394 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24395 \begin_inset Formula
24397 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24405 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24406 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24410 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24413 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24419 \begin_inset Formula
24421 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24429 \begin_layout Standard
24430 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24431 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24435 \begin_layout Standard
24436 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24437 left side and right side.
24438 If you use the option
24441 \begin_inset space ~
24446 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24447 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24449 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24454 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24455 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24458 \begin_layout Standard
24459 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24460 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24461 is to go inside the brackets.
24462 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24467 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24468 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24469 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24473 arg "math-delim ( )"
24479 \begin_layout Section
24480 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24481 \begin_inset Index idx
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 \begin_inset Index idx
24494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 \begin_inset Index idx
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24505 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24513 \begin_layout Standard
24514 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24518 \begin_inset space ~
24526 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24530 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24531 Here is an example:
24532 \begin_inset Formula
24534 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24543 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24544 \begin_inset space ~
24548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24550 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24555 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24556 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24557 This alignment is set in the box
24562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24611 for every column as default.
24612 For example, the sequence
24613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24624 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24625 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24626 corresponds to the relevant column.
24627 The result will look like this:
24628 \begin_inset Formula
24631 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24632 column & has & has\,right\\
24633 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24642 \begin_layout Standard
24643 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24646 arg "newline-insert newline"
24649 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24650 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24652 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24655 or the math toolbar.
24658 \begin_layout Standard
24659 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24660 It can be created with the menu
24662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24663 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24665 \begin_inset space ~
24677 Here is an example:
24678 \begin_inset Formula
24692 \begin_layout Standard
24693 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24696 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24699 arg "newline-insert newline"
24703 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24708 arg "newline-insert newline"
24711 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24719 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24720 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24721 A new row is created by every further entry of
24724 arg "newline-insert newline"
24728 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24729 Here is an example:
24730 \begin_inset Formula
24732 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24733 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24738 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24739 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24740 \begin_inset Formula
24742 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24750 \begin_layout Standard
24751 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24758 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24759 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24762 reference "eq:asquared"
24767 The other types are described in section
24768 \begin_inset space ~
24772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24774 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24781 \begin_layout Section
24782 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24783 \begin_inset Index idx
24786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24787 Math ! Formula numbering
24793 \begin_inset Index idx
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24797 Math ! Referencing formulas
24803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24805 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24812 \begin_layout Standard
24813 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24815 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24816 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24818 \begin_inset space ~
24822 \begin_inset space ~
24830 arg "math-number-toggle"
24834 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24835 within parentheses.
24836 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24837 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24838 the document class.
24839 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24840 separated by a dot:
24841 \begin_inset Formula
24851 arg "math-number-toggle"
24854 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24855 You can only number displayed formulas.
24858 \begin_layout Standard
24859 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24861 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24862 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24864 \begin_inset space ~
24868 \begin_inset space ~
24876 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24879 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24880 \begin_inset Formula
24883 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24889 To number all lines use the shortcut
24892 arg "math-number-toggle"
24898 \begin_layout Standard
24899 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24902 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24903 A label is inserted with the menu
24905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24914 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24915 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24916 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24928 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24929 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24930 We inserted in the following example the label
24931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24938 in the second line:
24939 \begin_inset Formula
24941 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24942 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24947 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24948 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24949 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24953 \begin_inset space ~
24961 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24965 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24966 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24967 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24968 as the formula number:
24971 \begin_layout Standard
24972 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24975 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24982 \begin_layout Standard
24983 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24984 's cross-reference box are described in section
24985 \begin_inset space ~
24989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24991 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24996 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25004 \begin_layout Section
25005 User defined math macros
25006 \begin_inset Index idx
25009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 \begin_layout Standard
25020 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25021 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25022 Math macros are explained in section
25025 \begin_inset space ~
25037 \begin_layout Section
25041 \begin_layout Subsection
25043 \begin_inset Index idx
25046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 \begin_layout Standard
25056 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25057 To set a font in a formula, use the
25060 \begin_inset space ~
25068 arg "math-insert \\font"
25071 , or enter its command, listed in table
25072 \begin_inset space ~
25076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25078 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25085 \begin_layout Standard
25086 \begin_inset Float table
25091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25092 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25097 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25101 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25111 \begin_inset Tabular
25112 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25113 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25114 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25115 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25349 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 \begin_layout Standard
25384 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25408 \begin_layout Standard
25409 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25410 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25415 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25416 space when you need a space in the box.
25417 Here is an example where
25418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25429 denotes the set of numbers:
25430 \begin_inset Formula
25432 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25440 \begin_layout Standard
25441 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25442 You can, for example, put a character in
25451 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25455 \begin_inset Newline newline
25458 So it is better not to use this feature.
25461 \begin_layout Standard
25462 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25463 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25467 \begin_inset Newline newline
25470 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25476 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25477 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25483 \begin_layout Standard
25490 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25493 \begin_layout Standard
25494 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25496 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25497 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25499 \begin_inset space ~
25507 \begin_layout Subsection
25509 \begin_inset Index idx
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25521 \begin_layout Standard
25522 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25524 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25528 \begin_inset space ~
25532 \begin_inset space ~
25540 \begin_inset space ~
25548 arg "math-insert \\font"
25552 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25553 in black instead of blue.
25554 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25555 Here is an example:
25556 \begin_inset Formula
25559 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25560 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25569 \begin_layout Subsection
25571 \begin_inset Index idx
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25583 \begin_layout Standard
25584 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25585 automatically chosen in most situations.
25603 For most characters,
25611 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25612 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25617 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25618 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25619 thinks are appropriate.
25620 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25623 arg "math-insert \\style"
25627 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25628 For example, you can set
25629 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25632 , which is normally in
25641 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25645 The four styles are used in the following example:
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25653 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25657 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25661 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25667 \begin_layout Standard
25668 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25669 is set in a particular size with the menu
25671 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25673 \begin_inset space ~
25678 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25679 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25680 will be adjusted to correspond.
25681 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25692 \begin_layout Standard
25696 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25702 \begin_layout Section
25703 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25705 \begin_inset Index idx
25708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25715 \begin_inset Index idx
25718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25727 \begin_layout Standard
25729 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25730 that are in common use.
25733 \begin_layout Subsection
25734 Enabling AMS-Support
25737 \begin_layout Standard
25738 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25739 the document by selecting the checkbox
25742 \begin_inset space ~
25746 \begin_inset space ~
25750 \begin_inset space ~
25757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25761 \begin_inset Index idx
25764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25765 Document ! Settings
25773 \begin_inset space ~
25779 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25780 -errors in formulas,
25781 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25784 \begin_layout Subsection
25786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25788 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25793 \begin_inset Index idx
25796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25797 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25805 \begin_layout Standard
25806 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25807 provides a selection of different formula types.
25809 allows you to choose between
25830 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25831 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25837 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25840 \begin_layout Chapter
25844 \begin_layout Section
25846 \begin_inset Index idx
25849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25858 name "sec:Cross-References"
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25867 's strengths is cross-references.
25868 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25870 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25871 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25872 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25875 \begin_layout Enumerate
25879 \begin_layout Enumerate
25880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25882 name "enu:Second-item"
25889 \begin_layout Enumerate
25893 \begin_layout Standard
25894 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25899 or by pressing the toolbar button
25906 A gray label box like this:
25907 \begin_inset Graphics
25908 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25913 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25915 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25950 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25951 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25967 \begin_layout Standard
25968 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25973 or the toolbar button
25976 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25980 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25981 \begin_inset Graphics
25982 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25987 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25989 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26002 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26006 \begin_layout Standard
26007 As an alternative to
26009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26012 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26017 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26018 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26020 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26034 \begin_inset space ~
26038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26040 reference "enu:Second-item"
26047 \begin_layout Standard
26048 It is recommended to use a protected space
26052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26053 described in section
26054 \begin_inset space ~
26058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26060 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26069 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26070 line breaks between them.
26073 \begin_layout Standard
26074 There are six formats of cross-references:
26077 \begin_layout Description
26078 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26081 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26088 \begin_layout Description
26089 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26090 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26102 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26109 \begin_layout Description
26110 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26116 LatexCommand pageref
26117 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26124 \begin_layout Description
26126 \begin_inset space ~
26130 \begin_inset space ~
26133 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26135 LatexCommand vpageref
26136 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26141 \begin_inset Newline newline
26144 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26145 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26146 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26147 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26148 it prints “on the next page”.
26149 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26152 \begin_layout Description
26154 \begin_inset space ~
26158 \begin_inset space ~
26162 \begin_inset space ~
26165 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26168 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26173 \begin_inset Newline newline
26176 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26182 ; otherwise it behaves like
26186 \begin_inset space ~
26190 \begin_inset space ~
26199 \begin_layout Description
26201 \begin_inset space ~
26204 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26205 \begin_inset Newline newline
26209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26217 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26227 \begin_inset Index idx
26230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26232 -packages ! prettyref
26238 \begin_inset Index idx
26241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26243 -packages ! refstyle
26254 \begin_inset Newline newline
26257 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26258 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26261 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26266 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26274 is the default and preferred because
26278 supports only English documents.
26279 The format is specified by using the command
26291 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26292 preamble of the document.
26293 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26306 ) can be done with this command
26307 \begin_inset Newline newline
26314 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26319 \begin_inset Newline newline
26322 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26324 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26326 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26333 \begin_layout Description
26335 \begin_inset space ~
26338 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26340 LatexCommand nameref
26341 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26348 \begin_layout Standard
26349 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26350 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26352 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26356 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26360 \begin_layout Standard
26361 You can only use the style
26365 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26369 is always possible.
26372 \begin_layout Standard
26373 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26374 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26376 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26377 \begin_inset space ~
26381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26383 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26390 \begin_layout Standard
26391 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26395 \begin_inset space ~
26399 \begin_inset space ~
26404 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26405 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26408 \begin_inset space ~
26413 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26414 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26417 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26423 \begin_layout Standard
26424 You can change labels at any time.
26425 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26426 do not need to think about this.
26429 \begin_layout Standard
26430 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26432 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26436 \begin_layout Standard
26437 References are described in detail in the section
26438 \begin_inset space ~
26442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26452 \begin_inset space ~
26460 \begin_layout Section
26461 Table of Contents and other Listings
26462 \begin_inset Index idx
26465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26472 \begin_inset Index idx
26475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26491 \begin_layout Subsection
26493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26495 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26502 \begin_layout Standard
26503 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26506 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26508 \begin_inset space ~
26512 \begin_inset space ~
26518 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26520 If you click on it, the
26524 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26525 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26526 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26528 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26530 \begin_inset space ~
26535 that is described in section
26536 \begin_inset space ~
26540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26542 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26549 \begin_layout Standard
26550 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26551 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26553 \begin_inset space ~
26557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26559 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26563 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26565 \begin_inset space ~
26569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26571 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26575 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26577 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26580 \begin_layout Subsection
26581 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26584 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26591 \begin_layout Standard
26592 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26594 You can insert them via the
26596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26600 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26603 \begin_layout Section
26604 URLs and Hyperlinks
26605 \begin_inset Index idx
26608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 \begin_inset Index idx
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26627 \begin_layout Subsection
26629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26638 \begin_layout Standard
26639 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26647 \begin_layout Standard
26648 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26650 \begin_inset Flex URL
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26663 \begin_layout Standard
26664 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26670 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26674 \begin_layout Standard
26675 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26683 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26692 \begin_layout Subsection
26694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26696 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26703 \begin_layout Standard
26704 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26709 or with the toolbar button
26716 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26725 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26726 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26727 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26729 name "LyX's homepage"
26730 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26734 , an Email address like this:
26735 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26737 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26738 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26743 , or a link to a file.
26746 \begin_layout Standard
26747 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26760 to the link target.
26763 \begin_layout Standard
26764 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26765 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26766 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26767 the text style dialog.
26768 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26774 name "LyX's homepage"
26775 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26782 \begin_layout Standard
26783 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26787 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26794 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26796 \begin_inset Newline newline
26804 \begin_inset Newline newline
26811 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26814 \begin_layout Section
26816 \begin_inset Index idx
26819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26828 name "sec:Appendices"
26835 \begin_layout Standard
26836 Appendices are created with the menu
26838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26840 \begin_inset space ~
26844 \begin_inset space ~
26850 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26851 as the appendix part of the book.
26852 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26855 \begin_layout Standard
26856 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26857 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26858 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26859 and the subsection number.
26860 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26866 \begin_inset space ~
26870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26872 reference "chap:Credits"
26877 \begin_inset space ~
26881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26883 reference "subsec:Export"
26890 \begin_layout Section
26892 \begin_inset Index idx
26895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26904 name "sec:Bibliography"
26911 \begin_layout Standard
26912 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26914 You can include a bibliography database,
26918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26919 Known under the name
26920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26923 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26933 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26934 manually, using the paragraph environment
26938 , which was described in section
26939 \begin_inset space ~
26943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26945 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26950 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26951 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26955 use a bibliography database.
26958 \begin_layout Subsection
26959 The Bibliography Environment
26962 \begin_layout Standard
26967 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26969 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26978 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26980 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26990 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26993 \begin_layout Standard
26994 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26999 or the toolbar button
27002 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27006 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27007 containing the available citations.
27008 Select one or more keys from the list and
27018 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27019 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27023 \begin_layout Standard
27024 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27025 entry with surrounding brackets.
27030 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27031 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27047 Companion Second Edition
27050 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27052 key "latexcompanion"
27059 \begin_layout Standard
27060 The \SpecialChar LyX
27061 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27071 \begin_layout Standard
27072 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27075 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27077 \begin_inset space ~
27085 arg "layout-paragraph"
27089 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27092 \begin_layout Subsection
27093 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27095 \begin_inset Index idx
27098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27099 Bibliography ! Databases
27105 \begin_inset Index idx
27108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27109 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27118 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27125 \begin_layout Standard
27126 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27132 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27134 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27135 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27140 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27142 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27143 your working field in a database.
27144 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27145 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27146 list for that document.
27147 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27151 \begin_layout Standard
27152 The database is a text file with the file extension
27153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27164 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27165 The format is explained in
27166 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27172 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27176 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27181 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27182 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27183 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27185 \begin_inset Flex URL
27188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27190 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27198 \begin_layout Standard
27199 To use a database, use the menu
27201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27206 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27208 \begin_inset space ~
27214 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27215 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27222 Add bibliography to TOC
27224 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27229 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27230 in the document or just the cited references.
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27234 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27246 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27247 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27248 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27249 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27251 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27257 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27258 \begin_inset Newline newline
27262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27264 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27276 \begin_layout Standard
27277 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27280 \begin_layout Standard
27281 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27282 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27284 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27292 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27297 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27298 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27299 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27303 The following variants are possible:
27306 \begin_layout Description
27307 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27308 with other bibliography packages (e.
27309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27313 \begin_inset space \space{}
27320 ), only with the package
27324 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27328 \begin_layout Description
27329 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27330 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27331 with all bibliography packages, except
27336 \begin_layout Description
27337 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27342 , works with all bibliography packages
27345 \begin_layout Standard
27346 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27347 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27349 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27352 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27356 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27365 \begin_layout Standard
27366 When you select the option
27368 Sectioned bibliography
27372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27373 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27376 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27377 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27379 Customizing Bibliographies
27383 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27388 Additional Features
27393 \begin_layout Standard
27394 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27395 the two methods of creating them.
27396 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27397 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27398 We used the style file
27402 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27405 \begin_layout Subsection
27407 \begin_inset Index idx
27410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27411 Bibliography ! Citation format
27419 \begin_layout Standard
27420 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27421 For this feature you need to enable the option
27427 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27431 \begin_inset Index idx
27434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27435 Document ! Settings
27445 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27446 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27447 style files as explained in
27448 the previous section.
27451 \begin_layout Standard
27452 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27453 the citation reference window.
27454 Here is an example where the text
27455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27459 \begin_inset space ~
27463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27466 appears after the reference:
27469 \begin_layout Standard
27471 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27474 key "latexcompanion"
27481 \begin_layout Section
27483 \begin_inset Index idx
27486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27502 \begin_layout Standard
27503 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27507 \begin_inset space ~
27512 or the toolbar button
27519 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27520 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27521 by \SpecialChar LyX
27522 as the index entry.
27525 \begin_layout Standard
27526 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27529 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27531 \begin_inset space ~
27537 A light blue box labeled
27538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27549 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27550 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27554 \begin_layout Standard
27555 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27556 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27557 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27558 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27562 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27569 \begin_layout Subsection
27570 Grouping Index Entries
27571 \begin_inset Index idx
27574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27583 \begin_layout Standard
27584 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27586 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27587 lists under the entry
27588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27596 First we create the entry
27597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27605 \begin_inset space ~
27609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27611 reference "subsec:Lists"
27616 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27617 \begin_inset space ~
27621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27623 reference "sec:Itemize"
27627 , we insert the command
27630 \begin_layout Standard
27636 \begin_layout Standard
27640 \begin_layout Standard
27646 \begin_layout Standard
27647 for the enumerated list in section
27648 \begin_inset space ~
27652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27654 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27661 \begin_layout Standard
27662 The exclamation mark
27663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27670 marks the grouping levels.
27671 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27672 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27673 If we don't have an index entry for
27674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27681 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27684 \begin_layout Subsection
27686 \begin_inset Index idx
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27690 Index ! Page ranges
27698 \begin_layout Standard
27699 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27701 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27702 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27703 an index entry in section
27704 \begin_inset space ~
27708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27710 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27717 \begin_layout Standard
27720 Paragraph environments|(
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 and another entry at the end of section
27725 \begin_inset space ~
27729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27731 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27741 Paragraph environments|)
27744 \begin_layout Standard
27746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27769 respectively start and end the index range.
27770 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27771 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27772 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27773 An example is the index entry
27774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27777 Document ! Settings
27778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27784 \begin_layout Subsection
27786 \begin_inset Index idx
27789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27790 Index ! Cross referencing
27798 \begin_layout Standard
27799 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27800 We referred for example in the index entry
27801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27809 \begin_inset space ~
27813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27815 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27819 ) to the index entry
27820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27827 in the same section using the entry
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27833 GIF|see{Image formats}
27836 \begin_layout Standard
27837 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27839 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27840 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27843 \begin_layout Subsection
27845 \begin_inset Index idx
27848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27849 Index ! Entry order
27857 \begin_layout Standard
27858 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27859 follow the rules for the index order.
27860 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27866 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27868 \begin_inset space ~
27872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27874 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27883 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27884 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27909 \begin_inset Index idx
27912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 Dummy entries ! maïs
27919 \begin_inset Index idx
27922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27923 Dummy entries ! maître
27929 \begin_inset Index idx
27932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27933 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27938 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27939 maïs, maison, maître.
27940 To achieve this, we use the command
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27946 previous entry@current entry
27949 \begin_layout Standard
27950 In our case we want to have
27951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27966 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27969 \begin_layout Standard
27975 \begin_layout Standard
27976 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27977 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27979 See the next subsection for an example.
27982 \begin_layout Standard
27983 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27989 \begin_layout Standard
27990 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27995 to generate the index (see sec.
27996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28002 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28011 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28012 -package aeguill in sec.
28013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28019 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28023 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28024 -packages although all these index
28025 commands start with
28026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28039 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28044 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28047 \begin_layout Standard
28059 \begin_layout Standard
28071 \begin_layout Subsection
28073 \begin_inset Index idx
28076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 Index ! Entry layout
28085 \begin_layout Standard
28086 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28087 \begin_inset Index idx
28090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28093 This is an italic dummy entry
28098 You can also format the page number using the character
28099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28106 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28107 -command without a backslash.
28108 We can write for example
28111 \begin_layout Standard
28114 italic page number:|textit
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28118 to get the page number in italic.
28119 \begin_inset Index idx
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28128 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28129 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28147 \begin_inset space ~
28153 Have a look at section
28154 \begin_inset space ~
28158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28160 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28164 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28168 \begin_layout Standard
28169 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28177 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28181 to generate the index, see sec.
28182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28188 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28197 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28202 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28203 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28206 key "latexcompanion"
28218 \begin_layout Standard
28219 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28221 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28222 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28223 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28224 If so, put the following in the preamble
28227 \begin_layout Standard
28239 \begin_layout Standard
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28249 \begin_layout Standard
28250 in the index entry.
28251 \begin_inset Index idx
28254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28255 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28260 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28261 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28262 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28265 \begin_layout Standard
28266 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28267 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28268 a bold font for all index entries.
28269 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28281 documentation for details,
28282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28284 key "makeindex,xindy"
28291 \begin_layout Subsection
28293 \begin_inset Index idx
28296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28305 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28312 \begin_layout Standard
28313 If the index generation program
28317 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28318 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28322 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28323 distribution, is used.
28327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28332 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28333 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28334 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28335 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28336 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28346 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28348 dialog, see section
28349 \begin_inset space ~
28353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28355 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28360 The available options are listed and explained in
28361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28363 key "makeindex,xindy"
28368 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28372 \begin_layout Standard
28373 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28374 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28378 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28382 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28383 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28386 \begin_layout Subsection
28390 \begin_layout Standard
28391 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28392 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28400 next to the standard index.
28402 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28403 that add this feature.
28410 \begin_inset Index idx
28413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28415 -packages ! splitidx
28420 package to generate multiple indexes.
28421 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28427 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28436 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28437 style, but it also includes
28438 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28439 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28447 \begin_layout Standard
28448 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28449 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28452 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28455 and select the option
28457 Use multiple Indexes
28464 already contains the standard index
28465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28473 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28474 also appear as a heading) to the
28478 input field and press the
28483 The new index now also appears in the list.
28484 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28485 label color to the new index.
28488 \begin_layout Standard
28489 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28492 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28499 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28500 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28501 are additional features:
28504 \begin_layout Itemize
28505 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28506 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28509 \begin_layout Itemize
28510 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28511 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28519 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28520 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28521 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28522 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28525 \begin_layout Section
28526 Nomenclature/Glossary
28527 \begin_inset Index idx
28530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28537 \begin_inset Index idx
28540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28571 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28578 \begin_layout Standard
28579 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28580 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28581 called nomenclature or glossary.
28584 \begin_layout Standard
28585 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28592 \begin_inset Index idx
28595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28597 -packages ! nomencl
28603 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28605 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28611 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28615 \begin_layout Standard
28616 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28617 and then use the menu
28619 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28625 \begin_inset space ~
28630 or the toolbar button
28633 arg "nomencl-insert"
28638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28649 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28652 \begin_layout Standard
28653 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28654 The first is the term or
28658 that you wish to define.
28663 of the term or symbol.
28666 \begin_layout Standard
28667 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28675 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28676 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28684 \begin_layout Subsection
28685 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28686 \begin_inset Index idx
28689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28690 Nomenclature ! Layout
28698 \begin_layout Standard
28699 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28703 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28710 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28718 \begin_inset Newline newline
28726 \begin_inset Newline newline
28732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28739 character starts/ends the formula.
28740 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28741 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28753 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28763 \begin_layout Standard
28764 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28765 -syntax is given in section
28766 \begin_inset space ~
28770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28772 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28779 \begin_layout Standard
28783 \begin_inset space ~
28788 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28790 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28795 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28802 in this document is:
28803 \begin_inset Newline newline
28808 dummy entry for the character
28813 \begin_inset Newline newline
28825 \begin_inset space ~
28835 font use the command
28864 \begin_layout Standard
28865 If the characters |
28866 \begin_inset space \space{}
28870 \begin_inset space \space{}
28874 \begin_inset space \space{}
28878 \begin_inset space \space{}
28882 \begin_inset space \space{}
28885 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28886 a quote character in front of them.
28887 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28888 LatexCommand nomenclature
28889 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28890 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28897 \begin_layout Subsection
28898 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28899 \begin_inset Index idx
28902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28903 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28911 \begin_layout Standard
28912 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28913 -code of the symbol
28915 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28917 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28920 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28921 LatexCommand nomenclature
28923 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28930 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28934 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28935 LatexCommand nomenclature
28938 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28943 They will be sorted by
28944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28970 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28973 will be sorted before the
28977 since the character
28978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28985 is considered in sorting.
28988 \begin_layout Standard
28989 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28992 \begin_inset space ~
28997 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28998 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29000 For the example given, you can insert
29004 in this field for the
29005 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29012 will be located before
29013 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29019 \begin_layout Standard
29020 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29034 \begin_layout Subsection
29035 Nomenclature Options
29036 \begin_inset Index idx
29039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29040 Nomenclature ! Options
29048 \begin_layout Standard
29053 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29054 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29057 \begin_layout Description
29058 refeq Appends the phrase
29059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29074 to every nomenclature entry, where
29080 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29083 \begin_layout Description
29084 refpage Appends the phrase
29085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29100 to every nomenclature entry, where
29106 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29109 \begin_layout Description
29110 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29113 \begin_layout Standard
29114 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29115 class options list in the
29117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29121 In this document the options
29128 \begin_layout Standard
29129 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29135 \begin_layout Standard
29136 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29137 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29142 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29145 \begin_layout Description
29155 \begin_layout Description
29158 nomrefpage Like the
29165 \begin_layout Description
29168 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29177 \begin_layout Description
29181 \begin_inset space ~
29187 \begin_inset space ~
29192 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29195 \begin_layout Standard
29197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29204 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29205 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29209 \begin_layout Standard
29217 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29220 \begin_inset Newline newline
29227 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29232 \begin_inset Newline newline
29236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29251 by their translation.
29254 \begin_layout Subsection
29255 Printing the Nomenclature
29256 \begin_inset Index idx
29259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29260 Nomenclature ! Printing
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29269 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29272 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29288 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29289 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29290 You can choose between these settings:
29293 \begin_layout Description
29294 Default a space of 1
29295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29301 \begin_layout Description
29303 \begin_inset space ~
29307 \begin_inset space ~
29310 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29313 \begin_layout Description
29314 Custom custom space
29317 \begin_layout Standard
29318 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29327 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29335 For example, in order to change the name to
29339 , add the following line to the preamble:
29342 \begin_layout Standard
29350 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29353 \begin_layout Subsection
29354 Nomenclature Program
29355 \begin_inset Index idx
29358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29359 Nomenclature ! Program
29365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29367 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29374 \begin_layout Standard
29380 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29381 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29383 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29388 by adding options, see section
29389 \begin_inset space ~
29393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29395 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29400 The available options are listed and explained in
29401 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29403 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29410 \begin_layout Section
29412 \begin_inset Index idx
29415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29422 \begin_inset Index idx
29425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29426 Document ! Branches
29432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29434 name "sec:Branches"
29441 \begin_layout Standard
29442 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29443 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29444 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29445 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29448 \begin_layout Standard
29449 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29450 allows you to put text into branches.
29451 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29452 To create a branch, either select the menu
29454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29455 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29458 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29460 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29467 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29468 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29469 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29470 and whether the name of the branch should
29471 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29472 (see below for an example).
29473 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29474 to the name of the other) and to add
29475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29487 \begin_inset space ~
29490 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29491 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29494 \begin_layout Standard
29495 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29496 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29501 where you can choose a branch.
29502 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29506 \begin_layout Standard
29507 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29508 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29512 \begin_inset Branch Question
29515 \begin_layout Standard
29516 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29525 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29528 \begin_layout Standard
29529 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29545 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29548 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29549 Consider for example a file
29550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29557 which has the above branches.
29559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29566 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29590 branch were inactive,
29591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29606 branch was active, likewise
29607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29622 branch was active, and
29623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29626 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29630 if both branches were active.
29631 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29635 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29641 \begin_layout Standard
29642 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29643 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29644 definitions for each branch.
29645 For example you can define for the question branch
29649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29650 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29651 -syntax, see section
29652 \begin_inset space ~
29656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29658 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29670 \begin_layout Standard
29680 \begin_layout Standard
29690 \begin_layout Standard
29691 and for the answer branch
29694 \begin_layout Standard
29704 \begin_layout Standard
29714 \begin_layout Standard
29715 \begin_inset Branch Question
29718 \begin_layout Standard
29722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29750 \begin_layout Standard
29751 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29754 \begin_layout Standard
29758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29787 Now it is possible to use the
29791 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29798 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29801 commands to obtain conditional output.
29802 Here is an example formula where only the
29809 \begin_inset Formula
29811 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29819 \begin_layout Standard
29820 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29828 \begin_layout Standard
29829 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29835 \begin_inset space \space{}
29838 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29840 For this advanced usage, see the
29845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29848 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29855 \begin_layout Section
29857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29859 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29864 \begin_inset Index idx
29867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29876 \begin_layout Standard
29879 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29880 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29883 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29885 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29891 \begin_inset Index idx
29894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29896 -packages ! hyperref
29901 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29902 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29903 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29904 part of the document.
29908 \begin_layout Standard
29909 The header information in the dialog tab
29913 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29914 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29915 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29916 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29920 \begin_inset space ~
29924 \begin_inset space ~
29929 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29930 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29931 and author entries.
29935 \begin_inset space ~
29939 \begin_inset space ~
29943 \begin_inset space ~
29948 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29952 You can specify in the dialog tab
29956 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29961 \begin_inset space ~
29965 \begin_inset space ~
29969 \begin_inset space ~
29974 option allows long links to be split;
29977 \begin_inset space ~
29981 \begin_inset space ~
29985 \begin_inset space ~
29993 \begin_inset space ~
29998 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30001 \begin_inset space ~
30006 colors the different links.
30007 The default colors are:
30010 \begin_layout Labeling
30011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30016 for hyperlinks and URLs
30019 \begin_layout Labeling
30020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30028 \begin_layout Labeling
30029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30037 \begin_layout Standard
30038 but you can change these in the field
30043 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30046 \begin_layout Standard
30049 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30057 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30058 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30059 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30062 \begin_layout Standard
30067 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30068 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30069 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30079 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30080 when opening the PDF.
30082 \begin_inset space ~
30085 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30089 1 will only display the sections.
30092 \begin_layout Standard
30093 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30094 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30100 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30101 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30110 \begin_layout Section
30112 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30116 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30123 \begin_layout Subsection
30126 \begin_inset Index idx
30129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30139 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30146 \begin_layout Standard
30147 As \SpecialChar LyX
30148 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30149 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30150 commands and constructs,
30153 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30154 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30155 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30156 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30157 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30158 cannot support all packages and
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30163 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30164 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30165 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30169 Code box is created by the menu
30171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30173 \begin_inset space ~
30178 or by the toolbar button
30191 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30199 \begin_layout Standard
30200 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30202 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30204 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30205 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30212 , you can write the command part
30218 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30219 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30223 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30224 Code box behind the word.
30225 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30226 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30230 \begin_layout Standard
30231 \begin_inset Graphics
30232 filename clipart/ERT.png
30240 \begin_layout Standard
30244 \begin_layout Standard
30245 This is a line with a
30249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30272 \begin_layout Standard
30273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30281 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30282 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30283 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30284 know that the command is finished.
30292 \begin_layout Subsection
30293 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30295 \begin_inset Argument 1
30298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30299 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30306 \begin_inset Index idx
30309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30319 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30326 \begin_layout Standard
30327 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30328 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30329 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30330 uses in the background.
30331 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30332 is based on commands, you can
30333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30341 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30342 any time if you know the right commands.
30343 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30344 is the end of the day.
30345 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30346 all caption labels bold.
30347 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30349 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30353 \begin_layout Standard
30354 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30356 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30358 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30370 \begin_layout Standard
30371 As result you find that the package
30376 \begin_inset Index idx
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30381 -packages ! caption
30387 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30392 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30396 \begin_inset space ~
30404 \begin_layout Standard
30409 usepackage[options]{package name}
30412 \begin_layout Standard
30413 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30414 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30415 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30416 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30419 \begin_layout Standard
30420 In your case the package name is
30425 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30430 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30431 So you add the command
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30439 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30442 \begin_layout Standard
30443 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30448 For more commands provided by the
30452 package, have a look at its documentation,
30453 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30467 \begin_layout Standard
30468 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30470 For example if you use a
30474 class, you don't need the package
30478 , you can instead write
30481 \begin_layout Standard
30486 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30493 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30494 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30501 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30505 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30506 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30508 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30509 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30510 Code box as described in the previous
30514 \begin_layout Standard
30515 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30516 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30519 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30521 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30528 \begin_layout Standard
30529 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30535 \begin_layout Standard
30539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30549 \begin_inset Note Note
30552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30553 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30561 \begin_layout Left Header
30562 \begin_inset Argument 1
30565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30585 \begin_inset Note Note
30588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30589 defines the header line as described below
30597 \begin_layout Center Header
30598 \begin_inset Argument 1
30601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 \begin_layout Right Header
30611 \begin_inset Argument 1
30614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30635 \begin_layout Left Footer
30636 \begin_inset Argument 1
30639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30660 \begin_layout Center Footer
30661 \begin_inset Argument 1
30664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30676 \begin_inset Newline newline
30680 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30686 \begin_layout Right Footer
30687 \begin_inset Argument 1
30690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30712 \begin_layout Section
30713 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30716 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30721 \begin_inset Index idx
30724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30725 Document ! Header/Footer line
30731 \begin_inset Index idx
30734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30743 \begin_layout Standard
30744 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30748 \begin_inset space ~
30759 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30765 \begin_inset space ~
30771 As a second step add in the menu
30773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30774 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30781 Custom Header/Footerlines
30782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30786 This module offers the following 6
30787 \begin_inset space ~
30793 \begin_layout Description
30795 \begin_inset space ~
30799 \begin_inset space ~
30803 \begin_inset space ~
30807 \begin_inset space ~
30811 \begin_inset space ~
30817 \begin_layout Description
30819 \begin_inset space ~
30823 \begin_inset space ~
30827 \begin_inset space ~
30831 \begin_inset space ~
30835 \begin_inset space ~
30841 \begin_layout Standard
30842 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30845 \begin_layout Standard
30846 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30847 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30849 \begin_inset space ~
30853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30855 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30859 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30862 \begin_layout Standard
30863 \begin_inset Float figure
30869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30872 \begin_inset Tabular
30873 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30874 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30875 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30876 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30877 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30879 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30897 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30908 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30926 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30937 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30941 The normal text on the page goes here.
30942 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30944 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30945 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30950 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30959 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30970 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30988 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30999 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31017 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31035 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31040 name "fig:Page-layout"
31044 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31057 \begin_layout Standard
31058 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31066 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31070 \begin_inset space ~
31075 is set to “Default”.
31076 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31085 \begin_layout Subsection
31089 \begin_layout Standard
31090 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31091 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31092 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31093 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31095 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31096 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31099 \begin_layout Standard
31100 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31101 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31107 \begin_inset space ~
31115 \begin_layout Description
31118 thepage prints the current page number
31121 \begin_layout Description
31124 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31127 \begin_layout Description
31130 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31133 \begin_layout Description
31136 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31137 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31144 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31147 because it usually goes in a left header.
31150 \begin_layout Description
31153 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31154 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31156 It is normally used in the right header.
31159 \begin_layout Subsection
31160 Default header/footer
31163 \begin_layout Standard
31164 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31165 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31166 footer has the page number.
31167 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31168 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31169 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31172 \begin_inset space ~
31180 \begin_layout Subsection
31184 \begin_layout Standard
31185 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31186 Some pages are different.
31187 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31188 a new part or chapter in your book.
31189 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31190 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31191 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31195 Header and footer decoration line
31198 \begin_layout Standard
31199 By default, you get a 0.4
31200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31203 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31204 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31216 in the following way:
31219 \begin_layout Standard
31226 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31229 \begin_layout Standard
31230 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31239 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31246 \begin_layout Standard
31247 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31249 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31250 \begin_inset space ~
31254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31264 Several header/footer lines
31267 \begin_layout Standard
31268 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31269 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31270 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31272 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31288 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31301 \begin_inset space ~
31309 \begin_layout Standard
31316 headheight}{height}
31319 \begin_layout Standard
31320 where height is a size in standard units.
31321 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31322 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31323 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31324 logfile with the menu
31326 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31332 \begin_inset space ~
31337 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31342 \begin_inset Index idx
31345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31347 -packages ! fancyhdr
31353 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31354 for your header/footer.
31357 \begin_layout Subsection
31361 \begin_layout Standard
31362 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31363 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31364 This example consists of the following definition:
31367 \begin_layout Description
31369 \begin_inset space ~
31378 , empty optional argument
31381 \begin_layout Description
31383 \begin_inset space ~
31386 Header empty, empty optional argument
31389 \begin_layout Description
31391 \begin_inset space ~
31400 in the optional argument
31403 \begin_layout Description
31405 \begin_inset space ~
31414 in the optional argument
31417 \begin_layout Description
31419 \begin_inset space ~
31432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31436 \begin_inset Newline newline
31440 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31447 in the optional argument
31450 \begin_layout Description
31452 \begin_inset space ~
31461 , empty optional argument
31464 \begin_layout Description
31467 headrulewidth set to 2
31468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31474 \begin_layout Standard
31475 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31476 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31482 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31491 \begin_layout Standard
31492 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31498 \begin_layout Standard
31502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31506 pagestyle{headings}
31512 \begin_inset Note Note
31515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31516 switches back to page style with the default headings
31524 \begin_layout Section
31525 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31528 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31533 \begin_inset Index idx
31536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31543 \begin_inset Index idx
31546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31555 \begin_layout Standard
31557 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31558 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31559 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31562 \begin_layout Subsection
31566 \begin_layout Standard
31567 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31573 \begin_inset Index idx
31576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31578 -packages ! preview-latex
31583 (on some systems named simply
31588 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31596 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31598 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31606 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31607 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31608 -package are automatically
31609 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31613 \begin_layout Subsection
31617 \begin_layout Standard
31618 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31619 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31621 activate the option
31624 \begin_inset space ~
31631 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31637 \begin_inset space ~
31641 \begin_inset space ~
31644 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31651 \begin_inset space ~
31664 \begin_inset space ~
31669 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31672 \begin_layout Standard
31673 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31678 \begin_inset space ~
31686 \begin_inset space ~
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31695 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31696 and when you finish
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31701 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31709 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31710 generated by activating the option
31713 \begin_inset space ~
31719 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31727 \begin_layout Subsection
31728 Selected document parts
31731 \begin_layout Standard
31732 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31733 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31734 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31735 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31737 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31743 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31744 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31745 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31748 \begin_layout Standard
31749 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31756 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31768 is explained in section
31770 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31775 \begin_inset space ~
31785 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31786 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31787 the final rotated boxes,
31788 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31789 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31791 Here is the result:
31794 \begin_layout Standard
31795 \begin_inset Preview
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31806 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31812 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31822 height_special "totalheight"
31827 backgroundcolor "none"
31830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31855 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31861 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31883 \begin_layout Standard
31884 Previewing works also for colors.
31885 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31904 is explained in section
31911 \begin_inset space ~
31924 \begin_layout Standard
31925 \begin_inset Preview
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31950 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31955 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31974 \begin_layout Standard
31975 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31981 \begin_layout Standard
31982 If \SpecialChar LyX
31983 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31984 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31985 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31986 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31987 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31988 the \SpecialChar TeX
31990 If \SpecialChar LyX
31991 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31992 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31994 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
31995 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
31996 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
31999 \begin_layout Subsection
32004 \begin_layout Standard
32005 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32006 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32009 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32011 \begin_inset space ~
32016 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32018 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32020 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32021 's main window, then only this selection
32022 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32023 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32024 the source view window.
32029 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32030 ; but note that if you have
32031 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32033 not just the one which is open at the time.
32036 \begin_layout Section
32037 Advanced Find and Replace
32038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32040 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32045 \begin_inset Index idx
32048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32055 \begin_inset Index idx
32058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32067 \begin_layout Subsection
32071 \begin_layout Standard
32072 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32073 allows for searching of complex,
32074 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32076 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32077 The key-features are:
32080 \begin_layout Itemize
32081 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32082 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32083 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32087 \begin_layout Itemize
32088 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32089 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32090 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32091 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32094 \begin_layout Itemize
32095 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32096 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32097 outside of mathematics environments
32100 \begin_layout Itemize
32101 Search may be widened to a specific
32106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32110 \begin_inset space ~
32113 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32114 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32121 \begin_layout Itemize
32122 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32123 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32128 \begin_inset space ~
32131 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32134 \begin_layout Subsection
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32139 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32141 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32154 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32157 ) or the toolbar button
32160 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32166 Advanced Find and Replace
32171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32175 \begin_layout Standard
32181 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32185 \begin_inset space ~
32190 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32193 arg "paragraph-break"
32197 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32198 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32202 arg "paragraph-break"
32205 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32209 searches backwards.
32212 \begin_layout Standard
32216 \begin_inset space ~
32221 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32230 \begin_inset space ~
32235 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32238 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32239 Searching for mathematics
32242 \begin_layout Standard
32243 Mathematical formulas, such as
32244 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32247 or something more complex like
32248 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32251 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32256 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32257 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32258 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32259 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32270 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32271 This is done by switching to the
32275 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32280 This way, entering in the
32287 \begin_layout Itemize
32288 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32289 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32292 \begin_layout Itemize
32293 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32294 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32297 \begin_layout Itemize
32298 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32299 of it only within section headings.
32300 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32301 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32305 \begin_layout Itemize
32306 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32307 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32315 The entries made in the
32319 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32322 \begin_inset space ~
32328 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32332 button or alternatively press
32335 arg "paragraph-break"
32342 while the cursor is in the
32345 \begin_inset space ~
32353 \begin_layout Standard
32354 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32356 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32360 \begin_layout Itemize
32361 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32362 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32370 with its typewriter version
32371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32385 \begin_layout Itemize
32386 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32392 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32404 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32411 (you may want to enable the
32414 \begin_inset space ~
32422 \begin_inset space ~
32427 options and disable the
32435 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32443 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32444 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32448 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32451 , or occurrences of
32452 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32456 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32462 \begin_layout Subsection
32466 \begin_layout Standard
32467 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32472 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32474 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32476 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32485 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32491 This is done with the context menu
32493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32494 Insert Regular Expression
32496 while the cursor is in the
32501 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32502 expression matching rules
32506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32507 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32514 \begin_inset space ~
32517 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32518 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32524 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32525 same text in the document.
32526 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32527 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32530 \begin_layout Enumerate
32531 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32536 editor the fraction
32537 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32541 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32544 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32545 fractions with the given denominator.
32548 \begin_layout Enumerate
32549 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32561 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32566 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32567 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32568 Also, by inserting a
32569 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32572 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32573 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32576 \begin_layout Standard
32577 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32578 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32579 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32582 , and referring back to them through
32583 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32587 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32591 For example, try searching with the regexp
32592 \begin_inset Newline newline
32595 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32598 \begin_inset Newline newline
32601 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32604 \begin_layout Standard
32605 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32608 \begin_layout Standard
32609 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32617 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32618 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32619 sub-expressions is absolute.
32621 \begin_inset space ~
32625 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32628 always refers to the first occurrence of
32629 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32632 in all entered regexps.
32640 \begin_layout Section
32642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32644 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32649 \begin_inset Index idx
32652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32663 has a built-in spell checker.
32666 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32673 key or the toolbar button
32676 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32679 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32680 beginning of the currently selected text.
32681 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32682 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32683 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32684 scrolled so that it is visible.
32685 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32686 n, if any could be found.
32687 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32691 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32692 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32695 \begin_layout Standard
32696 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32703 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32704 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32706 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32707 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32710 \begin_inset space ~
32718 arg "dialog-show character"
32721 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32723 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32726 \begin_layout Standard
32727 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32728 can be downloaded from here:
32729 \begin_inset Newline newline
32733 \begin_inset Flex URL
32736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32738 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32744 \begin_inset Newline newline
32748 \begin_inset space ~
32751 files for each language.
32752 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32753 \begin_inset space ~
32756 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32757 's installation subfolder
32765 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32767 \begin_inset Newline newline
32770 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32771 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32772 but in most cases these are
32788 is the language code.
32791 \begin_layout Subsection
32795 \begin_layout Standard
32798 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32799 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32801 \begin_inset space ~
32804 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32807 you can set the following things:
32810 \begin_layout Description
32812 \begin_inset space ~
32815 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32816 should use for spell checking.
32817 Depending on your platform,
32831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32832 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32833 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32848 \begin_inset space ~
32851 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32854 \begin_layout Description
32856 \begin_inset space ~
32859 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32860 will always use the given language
32861 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32864 \begin_layout Description
32866 \begin_inset space ~
32869 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32875 \begin_inset space \space{}
32879 This should normally not be needed.
32882 \begin_layout Description
32884 \begin_inset space ~
32888 \begin_inset space ~
32891 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32903 \begin_layout Description
32905 \begin_inset space ~
32908 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32909 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32910 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32911 appear in a context menu.
32912 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32916 \begin_layout Description
32918 \begin_inset space ~
32922 \begin_inset space ~
32926 \begin_inset space ~
32929 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32933 \begin_layout Section
32935 \begin_inset Index idx
32938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32947 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32954 \begin_layout Standard
32956 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32957 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32967 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32969 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32978 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32980 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32981 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32982 which are available for many languages.
32985 \begin_layout Standard
32986 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32987 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32991 \begin_layout Subsection
32992 Setting up the thesaurus
32995 \begin_layout Standard
33004 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33008 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33013 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33027 For instance, the US English files are named:
33030 \begin_layout Itemize
33034 \begin_layout Itemize
33038 \begin_layout Standard
33047 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33048 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33051 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33052 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33053 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33055 \begin_inset space ~
33060 ) to the path where they are installed.
33064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33065 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33066 ies, typical locations are
33072 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33076 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33080 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33083 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33089 LibreOffice-<Version>
33096 On the Mac, the default location is
33098 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33099 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33100 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33101 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33102 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33103 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33111 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33112 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33113 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33118 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33119 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33123 \begin_layout Itemize
33124 \begin_inset Flex URL
33127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33129 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33137 \begin_layout Standard
33138 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33139 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33141 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33142 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33143 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33145 \begin_inset space ~
33150 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33152 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33153 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33157 \begin_layout Standard
33158 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33160 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33163 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33169 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33172 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33173 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33181 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33182 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33183 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33185 \begin_inset space ~
33190 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33193 \begin_layout Subsection
33194 Using the thesaurus
33197 \begin_layout Standard
33198 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33200 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33203 or the toolbar button
33206 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33209 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33211 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33213 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33214 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33215 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33224 ), related terms (such as
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33236 ), compounds (such as
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33248 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33257 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33260 \begin_layout Standard
33261 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33262 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33266 \begin_layout Standard
33267 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33268 the dictionary, such as the above
33272 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33277 \begin_inset space \space{}
33280 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33281 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33282 For example, looking up the word form
33286 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33291 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33296 \begin_inset space \space{}
33307 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33308 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33309 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33312 \begin_layout Section
33314 \begin_inset Index idx
33317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33324 \begin_inset Index idx
33327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33328 Document ! Change Tracking
33334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33336 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33343 \begin_layout Standard
33344 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33345 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33346 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33347 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33351 \begin_inset space ~
33354 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33356 \begin_inset space ~
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33365 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33379 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33380 You can change the color in
33382 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33383 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33385 \begin_inset space ~
33389 \begin_inset space ~
33394 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33400 \begin_inset Index idx
33403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33404 Color ! Change tracking
33409 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33410 's status bar when the
33411 cursor is in changed text.
33412 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33415 arg "changes-merge"
33421 \begin_layout Standard
33422 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33424 \begin_inset Index idx
33427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33436 \begin_layout Standard
33437 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33443 \begin_layout Standard
33444 \begin_inset Graphics
33445 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33453 \begin_layout Standard
33454 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33460 \begin_layout Standard
33461 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33464 \begin_layout Standard
33465 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33471 \begin_layout Standard
33472 \begin_inset Tabular
33473 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33474 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33475 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33476 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33486 arg "changes-track"
33494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33502 \begin_inset space ~
33505 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33525 arg "changes-output"
33533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33541 \begin_inset space ~
33544 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33546 \begin_inset space ~
33550 \begin_inset space ~
33554 \begin_inset space ~
33563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33584 Jumps to the next change
33590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33599 arg "change-accept"
33607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33618 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33620 \begin_inset space ~
33629 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33638 arg "change-reject"
33646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33654 \begin_inset space ~
33657 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33659 \begin_inset space ~
33668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33677 arg "changes-merge"
33685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33693 \begin_inset space ~
33696 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33698 \begin_inset space ~
33707 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33716 arg "all-changes-accept"
33724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33735 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33737 \begin_inset space ~
33741 \begin_inset space ~
33750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33759 arg "all-changes-reject"
33767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33775 \begin_inset space ~
33778 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33780 \begin_inset space ~
33784 \begin_inset space ~
33793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33817 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33819 \begin_inset space ~
33828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33851 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33853 \begin_inset space ~
33869 \begin_layout Standard
33870 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33877 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33897 \begin_layout Standard
33898 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33899 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33900 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33901 the next change after the current cursor position.
33902 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33903 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33904 step to the next change.
33905 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33908 \begin_layout Standard
33909 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33910 to describe a change.
33913 \begin_layout Standard
33914 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33920 \begin_inset Index idx
33923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33925 -packages ! dvipost
33931 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33933 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33939 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33943 \begin_layout Section
33944 Comparison of Documents
33945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33947 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33952 \begin_inset Index idx
33955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33956 Comparison of documents
33964 \begin_layout Standard
33965 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33968 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33972 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33973 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33975 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33977 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33981 \begin_inset space ~
33985 \begin_inset space ~
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34010 \begin_inset space ~
34014 \begin_inset space ~
34018 \begin_inset space ~
34023 enables the change tracking option
34026 \begin_inset space ~
34030 \begin_inset space ~
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34039 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34042 \begin_layout Section
34043 International Support
34044 \begin_inset Index idx
34047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34048 International support
34056 \begin_layout Standard
34057 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34058 with any language you want.
34059 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34060 up \SpecialChar LyX
34062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34064 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34071 \begin_layout Standard
34072 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34073 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34074 \begin_inset space ~
34078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34080 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34087 \begin_layout Subsection
34089 \begin_inset Index idx
34092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34099 \begin_inset Index idx
34102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34103 Document ! Settings
34109 \begin_inset Index idx
34112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34113 Document ! Language
34121 \begin_layout Standard
34124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34128 dialog lets you set
34130 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34135 \begin_layout Standard
34140 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34145 \begin_inset space ~
34150 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34151 For details about the different encoding options see section
34152 \begin_inset space ~
34156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34158 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34165 \begin_layout Subsection
34166 Keyboard mapping configuration
34167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34169 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34176 \begin_layout Standard
34177 If you have for example a U.
34178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34181 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34182 can use an alternate keymap.
34183 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34188 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34189 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34190 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34193 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34194 \begin_inset space ~
34198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34200 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34205 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34206 which one you want to use.
34209 \begin_layout Standard
34210 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34211 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34212 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34216 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34217 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34218 one to support the characters you want.
34219 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34226 \begin_layout Chapter
34229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34231 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34238 \begin_layout Standard
34239 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34240 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34241 topic inside the user's guide.
34244 \begin_layout Section
34246 \begin_inset Index idx
34249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34258 \begin_layout Standard
34263 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34266 \begin_layout Subsection
34270 \begin_layout Standard
34271 Creates a new document.
34274 \begin_layout Subsection
34278 \begin_layout Standard
34279 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34280 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34281 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34284 \begin_layout Subsection
34288 \begin_layout Standard
34292 \begin_layout Subsection
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34297 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34298 Click there on a file to open it.
34301 \begin_layout Subsection
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34306 Closes the current document.
34309 \begin_layout Subsection
34313 \begin_layout Standard
34314 Closes all opened documents.
34317 \begin_layout Subsection
34321 \begin_layout Standard
34322 Saves the actual document.
34325 \begin_layout Subsection
34329 \begin_layout Standard
34330 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34333 \begin_layout Subsection
34337 \begin_layout Standard
34338 Saves all opened documents.
34341 \begin_layout Subsection
34345 \begin_layout Standard
34346 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34349 \begin_layout Subsection
34353 \begin_layout Standard
34354 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34355 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34356 It is described in the section
34358 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34363 Additional Features
34368 \begin_layout Subsection
34372 \begin_layout Standard
34373 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34374 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34376 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34377 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34381 \begin_layout Standard
34382 When using the menu entry
34385 \begin_inset space ~
34390 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34394 \begin_inset space ~
34398 \begin_inset space ~
34402 \begin_inset space ~
34407 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34408 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34411 \begin_layout Subsection
34413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34415 name "subsec:Export"
34422 \begin_layout Standard
34423 You can export your document to various file formats.
34424 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34426 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34427 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34428 during its configuration.
34431 \begin_layout Standard
34432 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34434 \begin_inset space ~
34438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34440 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34447 \begin_layout Description
34453 \begin_inset space ~
34456 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34458 \begin_inset space ~
34461 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34462 \begin_inset Newline newline
34465 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34466 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34470 \begin_layout Description
34471 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34477 \begin_layout Description
34479 \begin_inset space ~
34482 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34488 \begin_layout Description
34489 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34490 's native DVI-format.
34491 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34492 files paths or file names in your document.
34494 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34501 \begin_layout Description
34502 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34503 in files paths or file names
34506 \begin_layout Description
34508 \begin_inset space ~
34515 ) DVI-format using the program
34517 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34520 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34524 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34532 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34540 \begin_layout Description
34542 \begin_inset space ~
34545 (cropped) the same as
34549 but with cropped page margins.
34552 \begin_layout Description
34554 \begin_inset space ~
34557 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34561 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34566 \begin_layout Description
34570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34578 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34586 \begin_layout Description
34588 \begin_inset space ~
34592 \begin_inset space ~
34595 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34599 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34607 \begin_layout Description
34611 \begin_inset space ~
34620 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34621 source that is compilable with the program
34623 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34627 \begin_layout Description
34631 \begin_inset space ~
34636 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34637 source, additionally all images used in the document
34638 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34642 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34645 \begin_layout Description
34649 \begin_inset space ~
34654 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34655 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34656 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34664 \begin_layout Description
34668 \begin_inset space ~
34677 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34678 source that is compilable with the program
34684 \begin_layout Description
34686 \begin_inset space ~
34690 \begin_inset space ~
34697 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34698 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34704 \begin_layout Description
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34709 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34710 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34716 \begin_inset space \space{}
34721 \begin_inset space ~
34725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34740 represent the version number)
34743 \begin_layout Description
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34749 \begin_inset space ~
34752 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34753 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34754 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34758 \begin_layout Description
34759 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34760 's internal XHTML engine
34763 \begin_layout Description
34764 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34769 \begin_layout Description
34770 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34772 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34775 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34779 \begin_layout Description
34781 \begin_inset space ~
34784 (cropped) the same as
34787 \begin_inset space ~
34792 but with cropped page margins
34795 \begin_layout Description
34799 \begin_inset space ~
34804 PDF-format using the program
34808 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34811 \begin_layout Description
34815 \begin_inset space ~
34819 \begin_inset space ~
34827 \begin_inset space ~
34832 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34837 \begin_inset space \space{}
34840 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34844 \begin_layout Description
34848 \begin_inset space ~
34853 PDF-format using the program
34855 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34858 , produces PDF-files directly
34861 \begin_layout Description
34865 \begin_inset space ~
34870 PDF-format using the program
34874 , produces PDF-files directly
34877 \begin_layout Description
34881 \begin_inset space ~
34886 PDF-format using the program
34890 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34893 \begin_layout Description
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34902 PDF-format using the program
34907 , produces PDF-files directly
34910 \begin_layout Description
34914 \begin_inset space ~
34922 \begin_layout Description
34926 \begin_inset space ~
34930 \begin_inset space ~
34935 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34936 and then exported as text using the program
34941 \begin_layout Description
34946 PostScript format using the program
34951 \begin_layout Description
34952 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34953 source and also code in the statistical programming
34967 it is possible to use
34971 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34975 \begin_layout Standard
34976 If one of the menu entries
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34992 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34994 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
34996 \begin_inset space ~
35000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35002 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35007 \begin_inset Index idx
35010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35011 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35020 \begin_layout Subsection
35024 \begin_layout Standard
35025 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35026 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35035 reference "sec:Paths"
35040 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35049 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35050 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35051 's preferences as described in section
35052 \begin_inset space ~
35056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35058 reference "subsec:Converters"
35065 \begin_layout Subsection
35066 New and Close Window
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35070 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35074 \begin_layout Subsection
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35079 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35082 \begin_layout Section
35084 \begin_inset Index idx
35087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35096 \begin_layout Subsection
35100 \begin_layout Standard
35101 Described in section
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35108 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35115 \begin_layout Subsection
35116 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35119 \begin_layout Standard
35120 Described in section
35121 \begin_inset space ~
35125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35127 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35134 \begin_layout Subsection
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35139 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35140 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35143 \begin_layout Subsection
35147 \begin_layout Standard
35148 Selects the whole document.
35151 \begin_layout Subsection
35152 Find & Replace (Quick)
35155 \begin_layout Standard
35156 Described in section
35157 \begin_inset space ~
35161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35163 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35170 \begin_layout Subsection
35171 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 Described in section
35176 \begin_inset space ~
35180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35182 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35189 \begin_layout Subsection
35190 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35193 \begin_layout Standard
35194 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35198 \begin_layout Subsection
35202 \begin_layout Standard
35203 Described in section
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35210 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35217 \begin_layout Subsection
35219 \begin_inset Index idx
35222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35223 Paragraph ! Settings
35231 \begin_layout Standard
35232 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35233 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35237 \begin_layout Standard
35238 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35239 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35245 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35246 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35248 \begin_inset space ~
35256 \begin_layout Subsection
35260 \begin_layout Standard
35261 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35262 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35263 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35267 \begin_layout Standard
35268 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35270 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35271 The properties of tables are described in section
35272 \begin_inset space ~
35276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35278 reference "sec:Tables"
35282 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35283 \begin_inset space ~
35287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35289 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35296 \begin_layout Subsection
35297 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35300 \begin_layout Standard
35301 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35303 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35304 \begin_inset space ~
35308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35310 reference "sec:Nesting"
35315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35317 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35324 \begin_layout Subsection
35327 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35330 \begin_layout Standard
35331 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35332 nts of the same type.
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35340 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35344 for an explanation.
35347 \begin_layout Section
35349 \begin_inset Index idx
35352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35361 \begin_layout Standard
35362 At the bottom of the
35366 menu the opened documents are listed.
35369 \begin_layout Subsection
35370 Open/Close all Insets
35373 \begin_layout Standard
35374 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35377 \begin_layout Subsection
35378 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35381 \begin_layout Standard
35382 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35386 Math macros are described in the
35393 \begin_layout Subsection
35397 \begin_layout Standard
35398 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35399 \begin_inset space ~
35403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35405 reference "sec:Navigating"
35410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35412 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35419 \begin_layout Subsection
35423 \begin_layout Standard
35424 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35426 \begin_inset space ~
35430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35432 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35439 \begin_layout Subsection
35443 \begin_layout Standard
35444 Opens a window showing console messages.
35445 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35450 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35451 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35452 is processing the document.
35455 \begin_layout Subsection
35457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35459 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35464 \begin_inset Index idx
35467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35476 \begin_layout Standard
35477 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35478 All toolbars and the
35481 \begin_inset space ~
35486 can be turned on and off.
35491 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35503 \begin_inset space ~
35515 \begin_inset space ~
35520 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35524 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35531 \begin_layout Standard
35536 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35540 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35541 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35542 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35543 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35544 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35547 \begin_layout Standard
35549 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35550 \begin_inset space ~
35554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35556 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35563 \begin_layout Subsection
35567 \begin_layout Standard
35571 \begin_inset space ~
35575 \begin_inset space ~
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35583 \begin_inset space ~
35587 \begin_inset space ~
35591 \begin_inset space ~
35596 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35597 's main window vertically while
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35604 \begin_inset space ~
35608 \begin_inset space ~
35612 \begin_inset space ~
35616 \begin_inset space ~
35620 \begin_inset space ~
35625 will split it horizontally.
35626 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35627 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35628 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35629 three or more documents at the same time.
35630 To close a split view, use the menu
35633 \begin_inset space ~
35637 \begin_inset space ~
35645 \begin_layout Subsection
35649 \begin_layout Standard
35650 Closes a split view.
35653 \begin_layout Subsection
35657 \begin_layout Standard
35658 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35659 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35660 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35661 's main window fullscreen.
35662 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35663 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35666 \begin_layout Section
35668 \begin_inset Index idx
35671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35680 \begin_layout Subsection
35684 \begin_layout Standard
35685 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35692 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35703 \begin_layout Subsection
35705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35707 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35714 \begin_layout Standard
35715 Here you can insert the following characters:
35718 \begin_layout Description
35723 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35726 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35727 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35728 -packages you have installed.
35729 You can get a complete display by checking
35732 \begin_inset space ~
35738 \begin_inset Newline newline
35742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35750 Not all characters will be visible in the
35754 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35762 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35766 ) can display every character.
35774 \begin_layout Description
35775 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35779 \begin_layout Description
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35785 \begin_inset space ~
35788 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35789 \begin_inset space ~
35793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35795 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35802 \begin_layout Description
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35807 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35811 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35817 \begin_layout Description
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35822 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35825 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35826 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35832 \begin_layout Description
35834 \begin_inset space ~
35837 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35841 \begin_layout Description
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35846 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35850 \begin_layout Description
35852 \begin_inset space ~
35855 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35861 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35867 \begin_layout Description
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35872 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35876 \begin_layout Description
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35882 \begin_inset Index idx
35885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35892 \begin_inset Index idx
35895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35896 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35901 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35902 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35904 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35910 \begin_inset Index idx
35913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35921 \begin_inset Newline newline
35924 More information about this feature can be found in the
35930 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35936 \begin_layout Subsection
35940 \begin_layout Standard
35941 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35944 \begin_layout Description
35945 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35946 \begin_inset script superscript
35948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35957 \begin_layout Description
35958 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35959 \begin_inset script subscript
35961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35970 \begin_layout Description
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35975 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35982 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35989 \begin_layout Description
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35994 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35995 \begin_inset space ~
35999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36001 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36008 \begin_layout Description
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36013 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36014 \begin_inset space ~
36018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36020 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36027 \begin_layout Description
36029 \begin_inset space ~
36032 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36038 \begin_inset space \space{}
36041 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36042 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36051 To insert a fraction use the command
36056 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36060 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36069 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36076 \begin_layout Description
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36081 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36082 \begin_inset space ~
36086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36088 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36095 \begin_layout Description
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36100 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36101 \begin_inset space ~
36105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36107 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36114 \begin_layout Description
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36119 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36126 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36133 \begin_layout Description
36134 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36135 \begin_inset space ~
36139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36141 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36148 \begin_layout Description
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36153 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36154 \begin_inset space ~
36158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36160 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36167 \begin_layout Description
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36172 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36173 \begin_inset space ~
36177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36179 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36186 \begin_layout Description
36188 \begin_inset space ~
36192 \begin_inset space ~
36195 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36202 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36209 \begin_layout Description
36211 \begin_inset space ~
36214 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36215 as described in section
36216 \begin_inset space ~
36220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36222 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36229 \begin_layout Description
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36234 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36235 \begin_inset space ~
36239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36241 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36248 \begin_layout Description
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36253 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36254 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36256 \begin_inset space ~
36260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36262 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36269 \begin_layout Description
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36274 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36275 \begin_inset space ~
36279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36281 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36288 \begin_layout Description
36290 \begin_inset space ~
36294 \begin_inset space ~
36297 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36298 \begin_inset space ~
36302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36304 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36311 \begin_layout Subsection
36315 \begin_layout Standard
36316 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36320 \begin_inset space ~
36341 are described in section
36342 \begin_inset space ~
36346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36348 reference "sec:toc"
36357 is described in section
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36364 reference "sec:Index"
36372 is described in section
36373 \begin_inset space ~
36377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36379 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36385 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36388 is described in section
36389 \begin_inset space ~
36393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36395 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36402 \begin_layout Subsection
36406 \begin_layout Standard
36407 To insert floats, as described in section
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36414 reference "sec:Floats"
36418 and in detail the chapter
36425 \begin_inset space ~
36433 \begin_layout Subsection
36437 \begin_layout Standard
36438 To insert notes, described in section
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36445 reference "sec:Notes"
36452 \begin_layout Subsection
36456 \begin_layout Standard
36457 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36459 Branches are described in section
36460 \begin_inset space ~
36464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36466 reference "sec:Branches"
36473 \begin_layout Subsection
36477 \begin_layout Standard
36478 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36479 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36481 An example is the document class
36482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36489 with three custom insets.
36492 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36496 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36502 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36505 \begin_layout Subsection
36507 \begin_inset Index idx
36510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36519 \begin_layout Standard
36520 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36522 For more information see chapter
36524 External Document Parts
36527 \begin_inset space ~
36533 \begin_layout Subsection
36535 \begin_inset Index idx
36538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36547 \begin_layout Standard
36548 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36549 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36564 \begin_layout Subsection
36568 \begin_layout Standard
36573 dialog as described in section
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36580 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36587 \begin_layout Subsection
36591 \begin_layout Standard
36596 as described in section
36597 \begin_inset space ~
36601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36603 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36610 \begin_layout Subsection
36614 \begin_layout Standard
36619 as described in section
36620 \begin_inset space ~
36624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36626 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36633 \begin_layout Subsection
36635 \begin_inset Index idx
36638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36645 \begin_inset Index idx
36648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36649 Longtables ! Caption
36657 \begin_layout Standard
36658 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36659 Floats are described in section
36660 \begin_inset space ~
36664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36666 reference "sec:Floats"
36670 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36685 \begin_layout Subsection
36689 \begin_layout Standard
36690 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36697 reference "sec:Index"
36704 \begin_layout Subsection
36708 \begin_layout Standard
36709 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36710 \begin_inset space ~
36714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36716 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36723 \begin_layout Subsection
36727 \begin_layout Standard
36728 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36729 Tables are described in section
36730 \begin_inset space ~
36734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36736 reference "sec:Tables"
36740 and in detail in the chapter
36747 \begin_inset space ~
36755 \begin_layout Subsection
36759 \begin_layout Standard
36765 Graphics are described in section
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36772 reference "sec:Graphics"
36779 \begin_layout Subsection
36783 \begin_layout Standard
36784 Inserts a URL as described in section
36785 \begin_inset space ~
36789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36791 reference "subsec:URLs"
36798 \begin_layout Subsection
36802 \begin_layout Standard
36803 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36804 \begin_inset space ~
36808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36810 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36817 \begin_layout Subsection
36821 \begin_layout Standard
36822 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36823 \begin_inset space ~
36827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36829 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36836 \begin_layout Subsection
36840 \begin_layout Standard
36841 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36848 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36855 \begin_layout Subsection
36859 \begin_layout Standard
36860 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36861 title or caption of a float.
36862 Inserts a short title as described in section
36863 \begin_inset space ~
36867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36869 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36876 \begin_layout Subsection
36881 \begin_layout Standard
36882 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36883 Code box as described in section
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36890 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36897 \begin_layout Subsection
36899 \begin_inset Index idx
36902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36911 \begin_layout Standard
36912 Inserts a program listings box.
36913 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36915 Program Code Listings
36920 \begin_inset space ~
36928 \begin_layout Subsection
36932 \begin_layout Standard
36933 Inserts the actual date.
36934 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36938 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36946 \begin_inset space ~
36954 \begin_layout Subsection
36958 \begin_layout Standard
36959 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36960 \begin_inset space ~
36964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36966 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36973 \begin_layout Section
36975 \begin_inset Index idx
36978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36987 \begin_layout Standard
36988 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36989 \begin_inset space ~
36992 of the current document.
36993 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36996 \begin_layout Subsection
37000 \begin_layout Standard
37001 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37002 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37003 to jump, for example, between section
37004 \begin_inset space ~
37008 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37012 2.5 and use the submenu
37015 \begin_inset space ~
37019 \begin_inset space ~
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37032 \begin_inset space ~
37036 \begin_inset space ~
37042 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37046 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37052 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37055 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37058 \begin_layout Standard
37059 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37063 \begin_inset space ~
37068 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37071 \begin_inset space ~
37076 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37079 \begin_layout Subsection
37080 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37083 \begin_layout Standard
37084 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37088 \begin_layout Subsection
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37093 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37094 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37095 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37099 \begin_inset space ~
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37111 \begin_layout Subsection
37115 \begin_layout Standard
37116 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37119 The \SpecialChar LyX
37120 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37135 manual for a detailed description.
37138 \begin_layout Section
37140 \begin_inset Index idx
37143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37152 \begin_layout Subsection
37156 \begin_layout Standard
37157 Change Tracking is described in section
37158 \begin_inset space ~
37162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37164 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37171 \begin_layout Subsection
37179 \begin_layout Standard
37180 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37181 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37182 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37184 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37185 to the clipboard or update the view.
37186 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37190 \begin_layout Subsection
37191 Start Appendix Here
37194 \begin_layout Standard
37195 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37196 as described in section
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37203 reference "sec:Appendices"
37210 \begin_layout Subsection
37212 \begin_inset space ~
37218 \begin_layout Standard
37219 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37220 default output format for the document (menu
37222 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37223 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37224 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37242 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37246 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37249 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37250 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37255 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37260 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37272 \begin_inset space ~
37276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37278 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37282 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37283 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37286 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37291 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37293 \begin_inset space ~
37296 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37306 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37311 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37312 when it is first configured.
37313 The default output format is
37316 \begin_inset space ~
37324 \begin_layout Subsection
37325 View (Other Formats)
37328 \begin_layout Standard
37329 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37330 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37331 actual document with an external program.
37332 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37333 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37334 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37336 All possible formats are listed in section
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37343 reference "subsec:Export"
37348 You should at least see the menu entry
37353 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37355 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37363 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37368 \begin_inset Index idx
37371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37372 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37383 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37386 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37388 \begin_inset space ~
37391 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37393 \begin_inset space ~
37396 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37400 \begin_inset space ~
37404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37406 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37411 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37412 when it is first configured.
37415 \begin_layout Subsection
37417 \begin_inset space ~
37423 \begin_layout Standard
37424 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37425 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37428 \begin_layout Subsection
37429 Update (Other Formats)
37432 \begin_layout Standard
37433 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37434 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37437 \begin_layout Subsection
37438 View Master Document
37441 \begin_layout Standard
37442 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37463 manual for more information on this topic).
37464 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37465 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37469 \begin_inset space ~
37473 \begin_inset space ~
37478 generates the output of the whole book, while
37482 will just output the chapter alone.
37485 \begin_layout Standard
37486 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37487 in the document settings (menu
37489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37490 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37491 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37493 \begin_inset space ~
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37503 \begin_inset space ~
37507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37509 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37513 ) or in the preferences (menu
37515 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37516 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37521 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37526 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_inset space ~
37542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37544 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37551 \begin_layout Subsection
37552 Update Master Document
37555 \begin_layout Standard
37556 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37572 \begin_inset space ~
37577 manual for more information on this topic).
37578 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37579 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37582 \begin_layout Standard
37583 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37584 in the document settings (menu
37586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37587 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37588 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 \begin_inset space ~
37594 \begin_inset space ~
37600 \begin_inset space ~
37604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37606 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37610 ) or in the preferences (menu
37612 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37613 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37618 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37623 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37641 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37648 \begin_layout Subsection
37650 \change_inserted -195340706 1447278411
37652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37654 name "subsec:Compressed"
37663 \begin_layout Standard
37664 Un/compresses the current document.
37666 \change_inserted -195340706 1447279328
37667 Use this if you want to save a compressed document in uncompressed format
37669 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37672 Additional \SpecialChar LyX
37680 \begin_layout Subsection
37684 \begin_layout Standard
37685 The document settings are described in appendix
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37692 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37699 \begin_layout Section
37701 \begin_inset Index idx
37704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37713 \begin_layout Subsection
37717 \begin_layout Standard
37718 Spell checking is explained in section
37719 \begin_inset space ~
37723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37725 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37732 \begin_layout Subsection
37736 \begin_layout Standard
37737 The thesaurus is described in section
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37744 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37751 \begin_layout Subsection
37753 \begin_inset Index idx
37756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37763 \begin_inset Index idx
37766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37775 \begin_layout Standard
37776 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37777 the highlighted document part.
37780 \begin_layout Subsection
37786 \begin_inset Index idx
37789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37790 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37799 \begin_layout Standard
37800 Generates with the help of the program
37802 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37805 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37806 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37807 This feature is not available on Windows.
37810 \begin_layout Subsection
37816 \begin_inset Index idx
37819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37829 \begin_layout Standard
37830 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37835 \begin_inset space ~
37840 to see the full filename paths.
37843 \begin_layout Subsection
37845 \begin_inset Index idx
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37857 \begin_layout Standard
37858 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37859 files as described in section
37860 \begin_inset space ~
37864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37866 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37873 \begin_layout Subsection
37875 \begin_inset Index idx
37878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37891 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37909 \begin_inset Index idx
37912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37913 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37923 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37924 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37925 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37926 -packages and programs it needs; see
37928 \begin_inset space ~
37932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37934 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37941 \begin_layout Subsection
37945 \begin_layout Standard
37950 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37951 \begin_inset space ~
37955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37957 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37964 \begin_layout Section
37966 \begin_inset Index idx
37969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37978 \begin_layout Standard
37979 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37980 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37982 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37986 \begin_layout Standard
37991 \begin_inset space ~
37996 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
37997 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37998 packages and classes found
37999 by \SpecialChar LyX
38001 \begin_inset space ~
38005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38007 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38014 \begin_layout Standard
38018 \begin_inset space ~
38023 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38028 \begin_layout Section
38030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38032 name "sec:Toolbars"
38039 \begin_layout Standard
38040 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38041 \begin_inset space ~
38045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38047 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38054 \begin_layout Standard
38055 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38056 This is described in the
38058 Additional Features
38063 \begin_layout Subsection
38065 \begin_inset Index idx
38068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 \begin_inset Graphics
38079 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38087 \begin_layout Standard
38088 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38094 \begin_layout Standard
38095 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38112 \begin_inset Note Note
38115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38116 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38121 manual for more information.
38129 \begin_layout Standard
38130 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38137 \begin_inset Tabular
38138 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38139 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38140 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38147 \begin_inset Graphics
38148 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38162 pull-down box for the environments
38175 \begin_layout Standard
38176 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38184 \begin_inset Tabular
38185 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38186 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38187 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38188 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38212 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38242 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38272 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38288 arg "dialog-show print"
38296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38318 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38332 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38362 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38392 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38399 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38422 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38452 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38482 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38498 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38512 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38538 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38552 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38580 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38594 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38595 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 Emphasize text, function of the
38625 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38627 \begin_inset space ~
38630 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38660 Set text to noun style, function of the
38662 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38664 \begin_inset space ~
38667 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38685 arg "textstyle-apply"
38693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 Format text using the current settings in the
38699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38701 \begin_inset space ~
38704 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38737 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38757 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38785 arg "tabular-insert"
38793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 Toggle outline window on/off,
38829 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38836 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38845 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38857 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38872 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38884 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38897 \begin_layout Subsection
38899 \begin_inset Index idx
38902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 \begin_layout Standard
38912 \begin_inset Graphics
38913 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38921 \begin_layout Standard
38922 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38928 \begin_layout Standard
38929 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38933 \begin_layout Standard
38934 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38940 \begin_layout Standard
38941 \begin_inset Tabular
38942 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38943 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38944 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38945 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38982 arg "layout Enumerate"
38990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 arg "layout Itemize"
39017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39054 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 arg "layout Description"
39071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39090 arg "depth-increment"
39098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39104 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39106 \begin_inset space ~
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 arg "depth-decrement"
39136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39142 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39144 \begin_inset space ~
39148 \begin_inset space ~
39157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 arg "float-insert figure"
39174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39181 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 arg "float-insert table"
39205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39212 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39258 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39288 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39334 \begin_inset space ~
39343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39352 arg "nomencl-insert"
39360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39368 \begin_inset space ~
39377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39386 arg "footnote-insert"
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39407 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39432 \begin_inset space ~
39441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39464 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39465 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39467 \begin_inset space ~
39476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39485 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39570 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39579 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39594 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39610 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39625 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39627 \begin_inset space ~
39636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39645 arg "dialog-show character"
39653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39659 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39661 \begin_inset space ~
39664 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39680 arg "layout-paragraph"
39688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39694 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39696 \begin_inset space ~
39705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39714 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39728 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39742 \begin_layout Subsection
39743 View/Update Toolbar
39744 \begin_inset Index idx
39747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39748 Toolbar ! View / Update
39756 \begin_layout Standard
39757 \begin_inset Graphics
39758 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39765 \begin_layout Standard
39766 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39772 \begin_layout Standard
39773 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39777 \begin_layout Standard
39778 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39784 \begin_layout Standard
39785 \begin_inset Tabular
39786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39787 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39788 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39829 arg "buffer-update"
39837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39859 arg "master-buffer-view"
39867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39875 \begin_inset space ~
39884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39893 arg "master-buffer-update"
39901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39909 \begin_inset space ~
39913 \begin_inset space ~
39922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39931 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39946 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39947 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39948 Synchronize with Output
39954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39959 \begin_inset Graphics
39960 filename ../images/view-others.png
39962 groupId toolbarbuttons
39973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39980 View (Other Formats)
39986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39991 \begin_inset Graphics
39992 filename ../images/update-others.png
39994 groupId toolbarbuttons
40003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40010 Update (Other Formats)
40023 \begin_layout Standard
40024 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40028 \begin_layout Subsection
40032 \begin_layout Standard
40033 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40040 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40044 , the table toolbar
40045 \begin_inset Index idx
40048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40062 manual and the math macro toolbar
40063 \begin_inset Index idx
40066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40079 \begin_layout Chapter
40080 The Document Settings
40081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40083 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40088 \begin_inset Index idx
40091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40092 Document ! Settings
40100 \begin_layout Standard
40104 \begin_inset space ~
40109 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40110 is called with the menu
40112 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40116 You can save your document settings as default with the
40118 Save as Document Defaults
40120 button in any dialog.
40121 This will create a template named
40125 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40126 when you create a new document without
40130 \begin_layout Standard
40135 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40136 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40139 \begin_layout Standard
40140 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40141 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40142 to find the one you are looking for.
40143 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40144 the submenus of the dialog.
40146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40150 \begin_inset space \space{}
40154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40161 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40162 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40163 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40166 \begin_layout Section
40170 \begin_layout Standard
40171 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40173 Document classes are described in section
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40180 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40188 \begin_layout Standard
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40197 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40202 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40203 as a layout for a document class.
40204 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40206 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40215 \begin_layout Standard
40216 Some classes use special class options by default.
40217 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40221 and you can decide to use them or not.
40222 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40223 recommended you leave them untouched.
40228 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40229 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40234 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40236 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40242 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40243 \begin_inset Newline newline
40248 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40251 \begin_inset Newline newline
40254 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40255 distribution, see section
40260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40262 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40274 \begin_layout Standard
40279 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40280 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40281 in the background if the child document
40282 is opened without its master.
40283 This way child documents are always compilable.
40284 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40299 \begin_layout Standard
40300 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40311 \begin_inset Index idx
40314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40316 -packages ! prettyref
40322 \begin_inset Index idx
40325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40327 -packages ! refstyle
40332 for cross-references, see section
40333 \begin_inset space ~
40337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40339 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40346 \begin_layout Section
40350 \begin_layout Standard
40351 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40352 Please refer to the section
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40363 \begin_inset space ~
40368 manual for details.
40371 \begin_layout Section
40375 \begin_layout Standard
40376 Modules are explained in section
40377 \begin_inset space ~
40381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40383 reference "subsec:Modules"
40390 \begin_layout Section
40394 \begin_layout Standard
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40402 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40409 \begin_layout Section
40413 \begin_layout Standard
40414 The document font settings are described in section
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40421 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40428 \begin_layout Section
40432 \begin_layout Standard
40433 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40450 and whether it should be a
40453 \begin_inset space ~
40458 can also be specified here.
40461 \begin_layout Standard
40462 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40463 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40464 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40466 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40469 \begin_layout Standard
40472 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40475 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40476 justifies the text on screen.
40477 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40481 \begin_layout Section
40485 \begin_layout Standard
40486 This dialog is described in sections
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40493 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40500 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40507 \begin_layout Section
40511 \begin_layout Standard
40512 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40513 \begin_inset space ~
40517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40519 reference "subsec:Margins"
40526 \begin_layout Section
40528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40530 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40535 \begin_inset Index idx
40538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40539 Language ! Encoding
40547 \begin_layout Standard
40548 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40549 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40550 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40552 is always encoded in utf8).
40553 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40554 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40555 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40556 -command is not known for
40557 a particular character).
40560 \begin_layout Standard
40561 If you use the option
40566 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40567 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40568 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40570 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40571 exactly one encoding.
40572 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40575 \begin_layout Standard
40577 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40578 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40579 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40580 installation supports Unicode), choose
40581 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40582 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40583 is quite incomplete, so
40584 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40589 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40590 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40591 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40592 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40593 -commands is not used, because all
40594 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40595 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40596 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40597 , two new alternative engines
40598 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40600 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40602 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40605 \begin_inset space ~
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40621 \begin_inset space ~
40627 \begin_inset space ~
40631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40633 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40638 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40642 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40645 \begin_layout Standard
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40654 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40655 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40665 The possible settings are:
40668 \begin_layout Description
40669 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40671 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40672 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40676 \begin_inset space ~
40680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40682 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40689 \begin_layout Description
40690 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40691 format you will use.
40692 In many cases this will be
40697 \begin_inset Index idx
40700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40708 If the newer package
40713 \begin_inset Index idx
40716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40718 -packages ! polyglossia
40723 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40724 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40725 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40727 this package will be used instead of
40734 \begin_layout Description
40736 \begin_inset space ~
40747 would be more appropriate.
40750 \begin_layout Description
40751 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40752 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40756 (for German texts), type in
40759 \begin_inset Newline newline
40764 usepackage{ngerman}
40767 \begin_layout Description
40768 None will not use a language package.
40769 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40772 \begin_layout Standard
40773 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40776 \begin_layout Description
40778 \begin_inset space ~
40782 \begin_inset space ~
40786 \begin_inset space ~
40793 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40799 \begin_inset Index idx
40802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40804 -packages ! inputenc
40810 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40811 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40812 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40816 \begin_layout Description
40817 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40819 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40820 commands, which may result in a big
40821 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40822 -commands are needed.
40825 \begin_layout Description
40827 \begin_inset space ~
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40834 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40837 \begin_layout Description
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40846 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40849 \begin_layout Description
40851 \begin_inset space ~
40854 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40857 \begin_layout Description
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40866 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40867 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40870 \begin_layout Description
40872 \begin_inset space ~
40876 \begin_inset space ~
40879 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40883 \begin_layout Description
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40892 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40893 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40896 \begin_layout Description
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40909 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_layout Description
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40929 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40930 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40933 \begin_layout Description
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40942 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40943 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40944 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40945 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40956 \begin_layout Description
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40965 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40966 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40967 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40969 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40970 \begin_inset space ~
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40980 \begin_layout Description
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40989 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40992 \begin_layout Description
40994 \begin_inset space ~
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41001 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41004 \begin_layout Description
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41013 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41016 \begin_layout Description
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41021 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41024 \begin_layout Description
41026 \begin_inset space ~
41029 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41032 \begin_layout Description
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41041 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41044 \begin_layout Description
41046 \begin_inset space ~
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41056 \begin_layout Description
41058 \begin_inset space ~
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41065 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41068 \begin_layout Description
41070 \begin_inset space ~
41074 \begin_inset space ~
41080 \begin_layout Description
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41089 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41095 \begin_inset Index idx
41098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41105 , when using this, set the document language to
41110 \begin_layout Description
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41119 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41124 , when using this, set the document language to
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41133 \begin_layout Description
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41142 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41148 \begin_inset Index idx
41151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41153 -packages ! japanese
41158 , when using this, set the document language to
41163 \begin_layout Description
41165 \begin_inset space ~
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41172 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41177 , when using this, set the document language to
41182 \begin_layout Description
41184 \begin_inset space ~
41188 \begin_inset space ~
41191 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41196 , when using this, set the document language to
41201 \begin_layout Description
41203 \begin_inset space ~
41206 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41209 \begin_layout Description
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41222 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41225 \begin_layout Description
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41238 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41239 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41240 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41243 \begin_layout Description
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41255 \begin_layout Description
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41264 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41265 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41268 \begin_layout Description
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41277 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41283 \begin_inset Index idx
41286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41293 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41296 \begin_layout Description
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41309 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41316 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41319 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41326 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41327 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41329 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41332 \begin_layout Description
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41341 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41347 \begin_inset Index idx
41350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41357 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41360 \begin_layout Description
41362 \begin_inset space ~
41365 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41371 \begin_inset Index idx
41374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41376 -packages ! inputenc
41382 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41386 \begin_layout Description
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41399 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41400 \begin_inset space ~
41406 \begin_layout Description
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41412 \begin_inset space ~
41416 \begin_inset space ~
41419 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41420 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41421 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41425 \begin_layout Description
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41438 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41439 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41442 \begin_layout Section
41444 \begin_inset Index idx
41447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41454 \begin_inset Index idx
41457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41464 \begin_inset Index idx
41467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41468 Color ! Shaded boxes
41474 \begin_inset Index idx
41477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41478 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41486 \begin_layout Standard
41487 Here you can alter the font color for the
41491 (default: black), for
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41499 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41503 (default: white) and for
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41516 sets the color back to the default.
41519 \begin_layout Standard
41520 Clicking any button showing
41528 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41529 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41530 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41531 later more quickly.
41534 \begin_layout Standard
41535 Note, if you change the
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41543 font color and use the option
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41551 in the document settings under
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41559 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41566 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41573 \begin_layout Standard
41574 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41580 \begin_layout Standard
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41593 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41599 Code after a forced page break:
41602 \begin_layout Itemize
41603 For the page color:
41604 \begin_inset Newline newline
41611 pagecolor{color name}
41614 \begin_layout Itemize
41615 For the text color:
41616 \begin_inset Newline newline
41626 \begin_layout Standard
41627 You are restricted to one of
41663 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41676 \begin_inset Newline newline
41679 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41680 names to refer to them:
41683 \begin_layout Itemize
41689 \begin_inset Newline newline
41694 page_backgroundcolor
41697 \begin_layout Itemize
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41707 \begin_inset Newline newline
41715 \begin_layout Itemize
41719 \begin_inset space ~
41725 \begin_inset Newline newline
41733 \begin_layout Itemize
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41743 \begin_inset Newline newline
41751 \begin_layout Standard
41752 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41763 \begin_inset space ~
41771 \begin_layout Section
41775 \begin_layout Standard
41776 Here you can adjust the
41780 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41784 as described in section
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41791 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41798 \begin_layout Section
41802 \begin_layout Standard
41803 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41809 \begin_inset Index idx
41812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41824 \begin_inset Index idx
41827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41829 -packages ! jurabib
41837 Sectioned bibliography
41839 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41845 \begin_inset Index idx
41848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41850 -packages ! bibtopic
41855 and you can select a
41859 for the generation of the bibliography.
41860 For a further description see section
41861 \begin_inset space ~
41865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41867 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41874 \begin_layout Section
41878 \begin_layout Standard
41879 Here you can define the
41883 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41891 reference "sec:Index"
41898 \begin_layout Section
41902 \begin_layout Standard
41903 The PDF properties are explained in section
41904 \begin_inset space ~
41908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41910 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41917 \begin_layout Section
41921 \begin_layout Standard
41922 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41923 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41929 \begin_inset Index idx
41932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41934 -packages ! amsmath
41944 \begin_inset Index idx
41947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41949 -packages ! amssymb
41959 \begin_inset Index idx
41962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41974 \begin_inset Index idx
41977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41989 \begin_inset Index idx
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41994 -packages ! mathdots
42004 \begin_inset Index idx
42007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42009 -packages ! mathtools
42019 \begin_inset Index idx
42022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42034 \begin_inset Index idx
42037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42039 -packages ! stackrel
42049 \begin_inset Index idx
42052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42054 -packages ! stmaryrd
42064 \begin_inset Index idx
42067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42069 -packages ! undertilde
42074 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42077 \begin_layout Description
42078 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42079 -errors in formulas,
42080 ensure that you have this enabled.
42083 \begin_layout Description
42084 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42085 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42086 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42090 \begin_layout Description
42091 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42106 \begin_layout Description
42107 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42110 \begin_inset space ~
42122 \begin_layout Description
42123 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42134 \begin_layout Description
42135 mathtools is used for the math commands
42171 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42178 \begin_layout Description
42179 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42181 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42190 \begin_layout Description
42191 stackrel is used for the math command
42208 \begin_layout Description
42209 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42212 \begin_layout Description
42213 undertilde is used for the math command
42221 Accents for one Character
42230 \begin_layout Section
42234 \begin_layout Standard
42235 The float placement options are described in the section
42238 \begin_inset space ~
42246 \begin_inset space ~
42254 \begin_layout Section
42258 \begin_layout Standard
42259 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42261 Program Code Listings
42266 \begin_inset space ~
42274 \begin_layout Section
42278 \begin_layout Standard
42279 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42287 set to be used and set the
42292 The itemize environment is described in section
42293 \begin_inset space ~
42297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42299 reference "sec:Itemize"
42306 \begin_layout Standard
42307 You can furthermore specify a
42310 \begin_inset space ~
42315 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42316 command of the desired character.
42317 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42324 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42330 \begin_inset space \space{}
42334 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42344 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42345 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42348 \begin_layout Standard
42349 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42357 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42358 -packages in the preamble (menu
42361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42362 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42371 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42375 usepackage{textcomp}
42378 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42382 usepackage{amssymb}
42392 \begin_layout Section
42396 \begin_layout Standard
42397 Branches are described in section
42398 \begin_inset space ~
42402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42404 reference "sec:Branches"
42411 \begin_layout Section
42413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42415 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42422 \begin_layout Standard
42423 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42426 \begin_layout Description
42428 \begin_inset space ~
42432 \begin_inset space ~
42435 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42455 View Master Document
42456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42463 Update Master Document
42464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42471 menu or the toolbar.
42472 The default is set in
42474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42475 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42480 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42484 \begin_inset space ~
42488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42490 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42497 \begin_layout Description
42499 \begin_inset space ~
42503 \begin_inset space ~
42506 Output settings for the menu
42508 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42510 \begin_inset space ~
42516 For a detailed description see section
42518 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42531 \begin_layout Description
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42537 \begin_inset space ~
42540 Options offers settings for the export format
42548 \begin_inset space ~
42553 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42554 \begin_inset space ~
42557 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42561 \begin_inset space ~
42566 settings are described in detail in section
42568 Math Output in XHTML
42573 \begin_inset space ~
42582 \begin_inset space ~
42586 \begin_inset space ~
42591 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42594 \begin_layout Section
42602 \begin_layout Standard
42603 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42605 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42607 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42609 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42613 \begin_layout Standard
42614 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42615 -syntax is given in section
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42622 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42629 \begin_layout Chapter
42635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42637 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42642 \begin_inset Index idx
42645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42654 \begin_layout Standard
42655 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42657 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42661 It has the following submenus.
42664 \begin_layout Section
42668 \begin_layout Subsection
42672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42673 User Interface File
42674 \begin_inset Index idx
42677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42678 Customization ! of toolbars
42684 \begin_inset Index idx
42687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42688 Customization ! of menus
42696 \begin_layout Standard
42697 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42698 interface (ui) file.
42699 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42707 \begin_layout Description
42712 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42715 \begin_layout Description
42722 the menu entries in popup context menus
42725 \begin_layout Description
42730 specifies the toolbar buttons
42733 \begin_layout Standard
42734 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42735 and edit the entries.
42738 \begin_layout Standard
42739 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42751 entries must be finished with an explicit
42776 and in the case of the
42777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42789 The syntax for the entries is:
42792 \begin_layout Standard
42793 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42822 \begin_layout Standard
42824 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42827 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42828 -functions are listed in the menu
42830 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42840 \begin_layout Standard
42841 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42847 \begin_layout Standard
42848 For example, assuming you use the menu
42850 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42853 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42857 \begin_layout Standard
42858 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42882 \begin_layout Standard
42884 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42899 to have the sixth bookmark.
42902 \begin_layout Standard
42906 \begin_inset space ~
42911 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42912 's toolbar buttons.
42913 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42914 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42917 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42931 Enable tool tips in main work area
42933 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42941 \begin_layout Standard
42946 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42947 should display in the menu
42949 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42951 \begin_inset space ~
42959 \begin_layout Subsection
42963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42967 \begin_layout Standard
42970 Restore window layouts and geometries
42973 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42974 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42978 \begin_layout Standard
42981 Restore cursor positions
42983 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42987 \begin_layout Standard
42990 Load opened files from last session
42992 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
42996 \begin_layout Standard
42999 Clear all session information
43001 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43002 sessions (cursor positions, names
43003 of last opened documents, etc.).
43006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43010 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43015 \begin_inset Index idx
43018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43030 Backup original documents when saving
43032 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43033 it was saved the last time.
43034 It is stored in the
43037 \begin_inset space ~
43043 \begin_inset space ~
43047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43049 reference "sec:Paths"
43053 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43056 \begin_inset space ~
43062 The backup file has the file extension
43063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43080 Backup documents, every
43082 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43085 \begin_layout Standard
43088 Save documents compressed by default
43090 always saves files in a compressed format.
43092 \change_inserted -195340706 1447278517
43093 This applies to newly created documents only.
43094 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving
43096 \begin_inset space ~
43100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43102 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43111 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43112 Windows & work area
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43118 Open documents in tabs
43120 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43124 \begin_layout Standard
43129 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43142 reference "sec:Paths"
43146 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43153 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43154 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43155 of \SpecialChar LyX
43157 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43158 instance is created for each file.
43161 \begin_layout Standard
43164 Single close-tab button
43166 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43169 \begin_inset Graphics
43170 filename ../images/closetab.png
43177 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43178 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43181 \begin_layout Standard
43182 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43190 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43191 before the change takes effect.
43199 \begin_layout Standard
43204 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43206 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43208 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43212 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43213 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43214 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43217 \begin_layout Subsection
43219 \begin_inset Index idx
43222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43231 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43239 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43243 \begin_layout Standard
43244 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43252 This section only deals with the fonts
43256 the \SpecialChar LyX
43258 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43262 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43273 \begin_layout Standard
43274 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43291 (depends on the system) as its
43294 \begin_inset space ~
43310 \begin_layout Standard
43311 You can change the font size with the
43318 \begin_layout Standard
43323 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43328 points have the size of 1
43329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43333 \begin_inset space ~
43337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43339 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43344 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43349 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43350 \begin_inset space ~
43354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43356 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43363 \begin_layout Standard
43366 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43368 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43369 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43370 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43371 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43372 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43374 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43381 \begin_layout Subsection
43383 \begin_inset Index idx
43386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43387 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43394 \begin_inset Index idx
43397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43406 \begin_layout Standard
43407 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43408 by choosing an item in the
43409 list and selecting the
43416 \begin_layout Standard
43417 By checking the option
43421 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43424 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43425 \begin_inset space ~
43429 \begin_inset space ~
43434 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43437 \begin_layout Subsection
43439 \begin_inset Index idx
43442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43451 \begin_layout Standard
43452 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43456 \begin_layout Standard
43461 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43462 This feature is described in section
43463 \begin_inset space ~
43467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43469 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43476 \begin_layout Standard
43477 Checking the option
43480 \begin_inset space ~
43484 \begin_inset space ~
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43493 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43496 \begin_layout Section
43498 \begin_inset Index idx
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43510 \begin_layout Subsection
43514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43518 \begin_layout Standard
43521 Cursor follows scrollbar
43523 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43527 \begin_layout Standard
43528 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43529 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43530 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43533 \begin_layout Standard
43536 Scroll below end of document
43538 is self-explanatory.
43541 \begin_layout Standard
43542 In \SpecialChar LyX
43543 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43550 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43552 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43553 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43556 \begin_layout Standard
43559 Sort environments alphabetically
43561 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43564 \begin_layout Standard
43567 Group environments by their category
43569 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43572 \begin_layout Standard
43577 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43588 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43592 \begin_layout Standard
43593 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43598 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43599 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43603 \begin_layout Subsection
43605 \begin_inset Index idx
43608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43615 \begin_inset Index idx
43618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43619 Settings ! Shortcuts
43627 \begin_layout Standard
43632 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43634 Several binding files are available, among them:
43637 \begin_layout Description
43638 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43641 \begin_layout Description
43642 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43654 \begin_layout Description
43655 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43666 \begin_layout Standard
43667 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43672 , and binding files for special languages.
43673 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43678 \begin_inset space \space{}
43682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43690 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43691 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43692 will try to use the appropriate binding
43696 \begin_layout Standard
43697 Some binding files, like
43701 , only have a limited scope.
43702 When looking at the end of the file
43706 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43713 \begin_inset space ~
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43722 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43723 in the selected key binding file.
43726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43730 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43735 \begin_inset Index idx
43738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43739 Key Bindings ! Editing
43747 \begin_layout Standard
43748 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43749 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43750 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43751 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43754 Show key-bindings containing
43757 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43758 Insert there for example as keyword
43759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43766 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43767 functions that contain
43768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43776 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43777 All \SpecialChar LyX
43778 functions are also listed in the file
43783 that you will find in the
43790 \begin_layout Standard
43791 For example, to add the shortcut
43799 , select the function and press the
43804 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43805 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43808 \begin_layout Standard
43809 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43810 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43812 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43813 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43815 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43820 \begin_layout Standard
43821 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43824 \begin_layout Standard
43825 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43827 The syntax of the entries is:
43830 \begin_layout Standard
43836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43855 \begin_layout Subsection
43857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43859 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43864 \begin_inset Index idx
43867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43874 \begin_inset Index idx
43877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43878 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43886 \begin_layout Standard
43887 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43888 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43889 provides keyboard maps.
43890 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43891 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43894 \begin_inset space ~
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43903 and select the keyboard map file named
43910 \begin_layout Standard
43919 keyboard map and, if you use the
43923 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43926 arg "keymap-primary"
43932 arg "keymap-secondary"
43935 respectively or toggle between them with
43938 arg "keymap-toggle"
43944 \begin_layout Standard
43945 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43953 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43962 \begin_layout Standard
43963 You can also specify the mouse
43965 Wheel scrolling speed
43968 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43972 \begin_layout Standard
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43984 \begin_inset space ~
43989 you can select a key for zooming.
43990 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43993 \begin_layout Subsection
43997 \begin_layout Standard
43998 Input completion is described in section
43999 \begin_inset space ~
44003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44005 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44012 \begin_layout Section
44014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44021 \begin_inset Index idx
44024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44031 \begin_inset Index idx
44034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44043 \begin_layout Standard
44044 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44045 are normally determined during
44047 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44050 \begin_layout Description
44052 \begin_inset space ~
44055 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44056 's working directory.
44057 It is the default when you
44068 \begin_inset space ~
44076 \begin_layout Description
44078 \begin_inset space ~
44081 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44083 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44085 \begin_inset space ~
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44097 \begin_layout Description
44099 \begin_inset space ~
44102 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44108 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44112 \begin_inset Newline newline
44116 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44128 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44129 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44137 \begin_layout Description
44139 \begin_inset space ~
44143 \begin_inset Index idx
44146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44152 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44153 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44154 \begin_inset space ~
44158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44160 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44168 will be used to save the backups.
44169 \begin_inset Newline newline
44172 Backup files have the ending
44173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44183 \begin_layout Description
44185 \begin_inset space ~
44188 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44189 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44191 \begin_inset Newline newline
44198 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44204 You can edit this file with the program
44213 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44214 in its preferences under
44217 \begin_inset space ~
44223 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44228 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44230 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44231 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44237 and \SpecialChar LyX
44238 need to be running the same time.
44239 \begin_inset Newline newline
44242 The pipe is also used for the
44247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44253 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44258 \begin_inset Newline newline
44261 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44262 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44263 \begin_inset Newline newline
44279 \begin_layout Description
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44284 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44287 \begin_layout Description
44289 \begin_inset space ~
44292 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44293 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44294 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44297 \begin_layout Description
44299 \begin_inset space ~
44302 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44308 You only need to specify it if you are using
44312 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44314 For \SpecialChar LyX
44319 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44323 \begin_layout Description
44325 \begin_inset space ~
44328 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44329 When \SpecialChar LyX
44330 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44331 to find it on the system.
44332 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44334 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44343 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44344 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44347 \begin_layout Description
44349 \begin_inset space ~
44352 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44353 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44354 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44355 code or in the document
44357 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44359 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44360 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44361 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44362 scanned for the input files.
44363 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44364 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44366 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44367 compilation may fail for some documents.
44370 \begin_layout Section
44374 \begin_layout Standard
44375 Here you can insert your
44384 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44386 \begin_inset space ~
44390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44392 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44396 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44399 \begin_layout Section
44401 \begin_inset Index idx
44404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44405 Language ! Settings
44411 \begin_inset Index idx
44414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44415 Settings ! Language
44423 \begin_layout Subsection
44425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44427 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44434 \begin_layout Description
44436 \begin_inset space ~
44440 \begin_inset space ~
44443 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44445 You can find its actual translation status here:
44446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44448 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44455 \begin_layout Description
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44460 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44461 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44462 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44463 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44480 The most widespread language package is
44485 \begin_inset Index idx
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44495 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44497 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44498 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44499 come with the alternative
44505 \begin_inset Index idx
44508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44510 -packages ! polyglossia
44515 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44516 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44522 The available selections are described in section
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44529 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44536 \begin_layout Description
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44541 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44542 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44543 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44544 An example is the start command
44550 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44552 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44556 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44571 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44576 \begin_layout Description
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44586 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44587 command toggles the package on and off.
44590 \begin_layout Description
44592 \begin_inset space ~
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44599 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44603 \begin_layout Description
44605 \begin_inset space ~
44609 \begin_inset space ~
44612 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44616 \begin_layout Description
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44625 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44626 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44627 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44629 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44636 \begin_layout Description
44638 \begin_inset space ~
44641 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44643 When this option is not set, the
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44651 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44653 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44656 \begin_inset space ~
44664 \begin_layout Description
44666 \begin_inset space ~
44672 \begin_inset space ~
44678 When it is not set, the
44681 \begin_inset space ~
44686 is set to the end of the document.
44689 \begin_layout Description
44691 \begin_inset space ~
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44698 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44699 language will be underlined in blue.
44702 \begin_layout Description
44704 \begin_inset space ~
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44711 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44712 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44715 \begin_layout Description
44717 \begin_inset space ~
44720 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44721 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44722 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44723 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44726 \begin_layout Subsection
44730 \begin_layout Standard
44731 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44732 \begin_inset space ~
44736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44738 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44745 \begin_layout Section
44749 \begin_layout Subsection
44753 \begin_layout Description
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44759 \begin_inset space ~
44762 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44765 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44766 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44768 \begin_inset space ~
44774 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44777 \begin_layout Description
44779 \begin_inset space ~
44783 \begin_inset Index idx
44786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44793 \begin_inset Index idx
44796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44797 Settings ! Date format
44802 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44803 \begin_inset Newline newline
44807 \begin_inset Flex URL
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44812 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44818 \begin_inset Newline newline
44821 For example the format
44822 \begin_inset Newline newline
44826 \begin_inset Newline newline
44829 prints the date as day/month/year.
44832 \begin_layout Description
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44838 \begin_inset space ~
44841 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44842 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44845 \begin_layout Description
44847 \begin_inset space ~
44850 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44852 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44854 \begin_inset space ~
44860 For a detailed description see section
44862 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44867 \begin_inset space ~
44875 \begin_layout Subsection
44881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44883 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44888 \begin_inset Index idx
44891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44892 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44901 \begin_layout Description
44903 \begin_inset space ~
44911 \begin_inset space ~
44915 \begin_inset space ~
44918 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44923 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44944 are used for Cyrillic.
44945 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44958 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44960 sets up in the background.
44961 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44964 \begin_layout Description
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44973 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44978 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44982 \begin_layout Description
44984 \begin_inset space ~
44988 \begin_inset space ~
44992 \begin_inset space ~
44996 \begin_inset space ~
44999 options They only have an effect when the program
45003 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45006 \begin_layout Standard
45007 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45008 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45009 manuals of the applications.
45012 \begin_layout Description
45014 \begin_inset space ~
45017 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45024 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45031 \begin_layout Description
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45036 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45043 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45050 \begin_layout Description
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45055 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45062 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45069 \begin_layout Description
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45078 command Command for the program
45080 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45083 that is described in the section
45085 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45090 Additional Features
45095 \begin_layout Standard
45096 There are additionally the following options:
45099 \begin_layout Description
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45118 \begin_inset space ~
45121 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45139 to separate folders.
45140 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45142 \begin_inset Index idx
45145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45152 \begin_inset Index idx
45155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45164 \begin_layout Description
45166 \begin_inset space ~
45170 \begin_inset space ~
45174 \begin_inset space ~
45178 \begin_inset space ~
45182 \begin_inset space ~
45186 \begin_inset space ~
45189 changes Removes all manually set
45195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45198 \begin_inset space ~
45203 dialog when changing the document class.
45206 \begin_layout Section
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45212 \begin_inset Index idx
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45224 \begin_layout Subsection
45226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45228 name "subsec:Converters"
45233 \begin_inset Index idx
45236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45245 \begin_layout Standard
45246 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45247 from one format to another.
45248 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45249 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45256 \begin_inset space ~
45261 field and press the
45266 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45270 \begin_inset space ~
45275 drop-down list, modify the
45279 field and press the
45286 \begin_layout Standard
45289 Converter File Cache
45295 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45297 Maximum Age (in days
45300 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45301 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45304 \begin_layout Standard
45305 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45306 definition, is described in the section
45317 \begin_layout Subsection
45319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45321 name "sec:File-Formats"
45326 \begin_inset Index idx
45329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45336 \begin_inset Index idx
45339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45348 \begin_layout Standard
45349 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45359 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45362 \begin_layout Standard
45363 You can also define the
45365 Default output format
45367 that is used when you use
45369 View, Update, View Master Document
45373 Update Master Document
45379 menu or the toolbar.
45382 \begin_layout Standard
45383 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45394 \begin_layout Standard
45395 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45397 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45398 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45399 This is done by specifying a
45404 More about this is described in the section
45415 \begin_layout Chapter
45416 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45418 \begin_inset Index idx
45421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45430 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45437 \begin_layout Standard
45439 \begin_inset space ~
45443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45445 reference "tab:Units"
45449 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45450 and used in this documentation.
45453 \begin_layout Standard
45454 \begin_inset Float table
45460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45461 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45479 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45487 \begin_inset Tabular
45488 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45489 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45490 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45491 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45492 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45698 scaled point (65536
45699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45777 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45850 % of original image width
45855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46166 \begin_layout Chapter
46168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46170 name "chap:Credits"
46177 \begin_layout Standard
46178 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46179 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46182 \begin_layout Itemize
46185 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46188 \begin_layout Itemize
46194 \begin_layout Itemize
46200 \begin_layout Itemize
46206 \begin_layout Itemize
46212 \begin_layout Itemize
46218 \begin_layout Itemize
46224 \begin_layout Itemize
46230 \begin_layout Itemize
46233 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46236 \begin_layout Itemize
46242 \begin_layout Itemize
46248 \begin_layout Itemize
46254 \begin_layout Itemize
46260 \begin_layout Itemize
46266 \begin_layout Itemize
46272 \begin_layout Itemize
46278 \begin_layout Itemize
46284 \begin_layout Itemize
46285 The \SpecialChar LyX
46287 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46296 \begin_layout Standard
46297 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46300 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46307 \begin_layout Bibliography
46308 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46309 LatexCommand bibitem
46315 The \SpecialChar LyX
46317 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46320 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46325 \begin_inset Newline newline
46329 \begin_inset Flex URL
46332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46334 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46342 \begin_layout Bibliography
46343 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46344 LatexCommand bibitem
46345 key "latexcompanion"
46349 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46351 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46352 Companion Second Edition.
46355 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46358 \begin_layout Bibliography
46359 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46360 LatexCommand bibitem
46365 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46368 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46372 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46375 \begin_layout Bibliography
46376 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46377 LatexCommand bibitem
46385 : A Document Preparation System.
46388 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46391 \begin_layout Bibliography
46392 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46393 LatexCommand bibitem
46402 The \SpecialChar TeX
46406 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46409 \begin_layout Bibliography
46410 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46411 LatexCommand bibitem
46416 The \SpecialChar TeX
46418 \begin_inset Newline newline
46422 \begin_inset Flex URL
46425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46427 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46435 \begin_layout Bibliography
46436 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46437 LatexCommand bibitem
46442 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46444 \begin_inset Newline newline
46448 \begin_inset Flex URL
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46453 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46461 \begin_layout Bibliography
46462 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46463 LatexCommand bibitem
46469 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46471 name "Documentation"
46472 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46478 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46482 \begin_inset Newline newline
46486 \begin_inset Flex URL
46489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46491 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46499 \begin_layout Bibliography
46500 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46501 LatexCommand bibitem
46507 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46509 name "Documentation"
46510 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46514 how to use the program
46516 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46520 \begin_inset Newline newline
46524 \begin_inset Flex URL
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46529 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46537 \begin_layout Bibliography
46538 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46539 LatexCommand bibitem
46545 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46547 name "Documentation"
46548 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46557 \begin_inset Newline newline
46561 \begin_inset Flex URL
46564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46566 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46574 \begin_layout Bibliography
46575 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46576 LatexCommand bibitem
46582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46584 name "Documentation"
46585 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46594 \begin_inset Newline newline
46598 \begin_inset Flex URL
46601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46603 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46611 \begin_layout Bibliography
46612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46613 LatexCommand bibitem
46619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46621 name "Documentation"
46622 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46626 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46628 \begin_inset Newline newline
46632 \begin_inset Flex URL
46635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46637 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46645 \begin_layout Bibliography
46646 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46647 LatexCommand bibitem
46653 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46655 name "Documentation"
46656 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46660 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46666 \begin_inset Index idx
46669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46671 -packages ! caption
46677 \begin_inset Newline newline
46681 \begin_inset Flex URL
46684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46686 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46694 \begin_layout Bibliography
46695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46696 LatexCommand bibitem
46702 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46704 name "Documentation"
46705 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46709 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46715 \begin_inset Index idx
46718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46720 -packages ! enumitem
46726 \begin_inset Newline newline
46730 \begin_inset Flex URL
46733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46735 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46743 \begin_layout Bibliography
46744 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46745 LatexCommand bibitem
46751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46753 name "Documentation"
46754 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46758 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46764 \begin_inset Index idx
46767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46769 -packages ! fancyhdr
46775 \begin_inset Newline newline
46779 \begin_inset Flex URL
46782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46784 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46792 \begin_layout Bibliography
46793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46794 LatexCommand bibitem
46800 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46802 name "Documentation"
46803 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46807 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46813 \begin_inset Index idx
46816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46818 -packages ! hyperref
46824 \begin_inset Newline newline
46828 \begin_inset Flex URL
46831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46833 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46841 \begin_layout Bibliography
46842 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46843 LatexCommand bibitem
46849 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46851 name "Documentation"
46852 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46856 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46862 \begin_inset Index idx
46865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46867 -packages ! nomencl
46873 \begin_inset Newline newline
46877 \begin_inset Flex URL
46880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46882 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46890 \begin_layout Bibliography
46891 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46892 LatexCommand bibitem
46898 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46900 name "Documentation"
46901 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46905 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46911 \begin_inset Index idx
46914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46916 -packages ! prettyref
46922 \begin_inset Newline newline
46926 \begin_inset Flex URL
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46939 \begin_layout Bibliography
46940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46941 LatexCommand bibitem
46947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46949 name "Documentation"
46950 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46954 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46960 \begin_inset Index idx
46963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46965 -packages ! refstyle
46971 \begin_inset Newline newline
46975 \begin_inset Flex URL
46978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46980 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46988 \begin_layout Bibliography
46989 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46990 LatexCommand bibitem
46996 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46999 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47003 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47005 \begin_inset Newline newline
47009 \begin_inset Flex URL
47012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47014 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47022 \begin_layout Bibliography
47023 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47024 LatexCommand bibitem
47030 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47033 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47037 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47039 \begin_inset Newline newline
47043 \begin_inset Flex URL
47046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47048 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47056 \begin_layout Bibliography
47057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47058 LatexCommand bibitem
47064 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47067 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47071 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47072 for Cyrillic languages:
47073 \begin_inset Newline newline
47077 \begin_inset Flex URL
47080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47082 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47090 \begin_layout Bibliography
47091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47092 LatexCommand bibitem
47098 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47101 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47105 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47107 \begin_inset Newline newline
47111 \begin_inset Flex URL
47114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47116 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47124 \begin_layout Bibliography
47125 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47126 LatexCommand bibitem
47132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47135 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47139 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47141 \begin_inset Newline newline
47145 \begin_inset Flex URL
47148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47150 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47158 \begin_layout Bibliography
47159 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47160 LatexCommand bibitem
47166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47169 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47173 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47175 \begin_inset Newline newline
47179 \begin_inset Flex URL
47182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47184 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47192 \begin_layout Bibliography
47193 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47194 LatexCommand bibitem
47200 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47203 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47207 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47209 \begin_inset Newline newline
47213 \begin_inset Flex URL
47216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47218 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47226 \begin_layout Bibliography
47227 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47228 LatexCommand bibitem
47234 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47237 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47241 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47243 \begin_inset Newline newline
47247 \begin_inset Flex URL
47250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47252 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47260 \begin_layout Bibliography
47261 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47262 LatexCommand bibitem
47268 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47271 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47275 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47277 \begin_inset Newline newline
47281 \begin_inset Flex URL
47284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47286 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47294 \begin_layout Bibliography
47295 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47296 LatexCommand bibitem
47302 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47305 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47309 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47311 \begin_inset Newline newline
47315 \begin_inset Flex URL
47318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47320 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47328 \begin_layout Bibliography
47329 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47330 LatexCommand bibitem
47336 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47339 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47343 about new features in
47349 \begin_inset Newline newline
47353 \begin_inset Flex URL
47356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47358 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47366 \begin_layout Standard
47367 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47401 \begin_inset Note Note
47404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47411 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47412 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47413 bibliography is the second one:
47421 \begin_layout Standard
47422 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47423 LatexCommand bibtex
47424 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47425 options "biblio/alphadin"
47432 \begin_layout Standard
47433 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47437 \begin_layout Standard
47438 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47439 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47445 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47446 LatexCommand printindex